BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF
The Ultimate Driving Machine
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
X6 xDrive 35i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 015 021 US English XII/07, 12 07 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the index, refer to page 266.
Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system
Controls 28 Opening and closing 42 Adjusting 53 Transporting children safely 56 Driving 68 Everything under control 81 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety 99 Lamps 103 Climate 112 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips 126 Things to remember when driving
Navigation 134 Starting navigation system 136 Destination entry 148 Destination guidance 156 What to do if
Entertainment 160 On/Off and settings 164 Radio 170 Satellite radio 173 CD player and CD changer 179 DVD changer 186 AUX-In connection 187 USB audio interface 190 DVD system in rear
Communications 206 Telephoning 221 BMW Assist
Mobility 230 Refueling 232 Wheels and tires 239 Under the hood 243 Maintenance 245 Replacing components 252 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference 258 Technical data 262 Short commands of voice command
system 266 Everything from A to Z
N o
te s
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual We have made every effort to ensure that you are able to find what you need in this Owner's Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.
Additional sources of information If you have additional questions, your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center is always happy to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech- nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
5
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The individual vehicle When purchasing your BMW, you have decided in favor of a model with individualized equip- ment and features. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip- ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible that the features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor- responding work on your BMW performed only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop- erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
N o
te s
6
Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW Sports Activity Vehi- cle Centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive dam- age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter- fere with the vehicle's electrical system, or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. Refer to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Cen- ter for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to issue the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<
7
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.
C o
ck p
it
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Rear window safety switch 39
2 Opening and closing windows 38
3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 50
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors 49 Automatic curb monitor* 50
5 Instrument lighting 102
Fog lamps 101
6 Parking lamps 99
Low beams 99
Automatic headlamp control* 99 Adaptive Head Light* 101
7 Head-Up Display* 97
A t
a g
la n
ce
11
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
9 Automatic transmission: Upshifting or downshifting 62
10 Instrument panel 12
13 Ignition lock 56
14 Buttons on steering wheel
15 Horn, entire surface
18 Releasing hood 239
8 Turn signals 64
High beams, headlamp flasher 64
Roadside parking lamps* 101
Time, date, outside temperature, Check Control 68, 76
Computer 70
11 Windshield wipers 64
Rain sensor 65
12 Starting/stopping engine and switching ignition on/off 56
Telephone*:
> Press: accepting and ending call, starting dialing* for selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice command system* 23
Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling in phone book and in lists with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 51
Individually programmable 51
Steering wheel heating* 51
16 Steering wheel adjustment 51
17 Cruise control* 66
C o
ck p
it
12
Instrument panel
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 69
5 Engine oil temperature 69
6 Display for
> Clock/date 68
> Outside temperature 68
> Indicator and warning lamps 75
> Speed of cruise control* 66
7 Display for
> Odometer and trip odometer 68
> Computer 70
> Date and remaining travel distance for service requirements 72
> Automatic transmission positions 61
> HDC Hill Descent Control 87
> Check Control message present 75
> Adaptive Drive* 88
> Dynamic Performance Control 87
8 Fuel gauge 69
9 Resetting trip odometer 68 Displaying service requirement 68
A t
a g
la n
ce
13
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by briefly lighting up during starting of the engine or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con- trol Display explain the meaning of the dis- played indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on the corresponding need to take action can be displayed via the Check Con- trol, refer to page 75.
In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor- mation is displayed immediately when the related lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps indicate that cer- tain functions are activated:
With parking brake set 58
With parking brake set for Canadian models
Fog lamps 101
High beams/headlamp flasher 101
Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC controls the drive and braking forces for maintaining vehicle stability 86
C o
ck p
it
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
A t
a g
la n
ce
15
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
1 Microphone for hands-free mode for telephone* and for voice command system* 23
2 Initiatingan emergency call 252
3 Reading lamps 102
4 Glass sunroof*, electric 39
5 Interior lamps 102
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 95
7 Control Display 16 Displays for menu navigation
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Central locking system 29
10 Opening glove compartment 115
11 Automatic climate control 104
12 Ejecting audio CD
13 Changing
> radio station 160
> track 160
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD with navigation system* 134
18 Controller 16 Turn, press or move horizontally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Automatic Hold 58
21 Parking brake 57
22 Adaptive Drive* 88
23 Programmable memory/direct selection buttons 21
24 Switching Entertainment sound output on/off and adjusting volume 160
Manual air distribution 105
Automatic air distribution and volume 104
Cooling function 106
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 106
Maximum cooling 106
Air volume 105 Residual heat utilization 107
Defrosting windows and removing condensation 105
Rear window defroster 105
Seat heating* 48
Active seat ventilation* 48
17 Opening liftgate 33
Active seat* 49
PDC Park Distance Control* 81 Rear view camera* 83
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 86
HDC Hill Descent Control 87
iD ri
ve
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a central position. The following section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func- tions is described in connection with the rele- vant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button Opening start menu
3 Controller With the controller you can select menu items and make settings:
> move in four directions, arrows 4
> turn, arrow 5
> press, arrow 6
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never attempt to use the controls or make entries unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
A t
a g
la n
ce
17
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Menu overview
Communication > Telephone* > BMW Assist* or TeleService*
Navigation or onboard information > Navigation system* > Onboard information, e.g. for displaying
the average fuel consumption
Entertainment > Radio
> CD player and CD changer* > External audio device
Climate > Vent settings
> Seat heater distribution* > Automatic programs
> Parked car ventilation*
menu > Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for traffic information* > Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of maintenance intervals and dead- lines for legally mandated inspections
> Settings for telephone*
Operating principle From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the fol- lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- play:
To hide the message: Press the controller. This displays the start menu.
On vehicles with a single drive, the message automatically disappears after approx. 10 sec- onds.
Start menu
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using five menu items.
Opening start menu Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
iD ri
ve
18
Opening menu items of start menu
With the start menu you can open the menu items Communication, Navigation, Entertain- ment and Climate by moving the controller to the left, right, front or rear.
You can open the menu by pressing the con- troller.
Comfort opening of menu items Comfort opening offers you:
> Opening of a menu item of the start menu in the last display shown
> Direct changing between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without pressing the button
For this purpose, move the controller in the cor- responding direction and hold it for longer than approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is divided into fields. The respective active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu item of the start menu:
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.
3 Settings are displayed graphically or numerically.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
A t
a g
la n
ce
19
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Operating principle at a glance Basic operation via iDrive is described in this view.
You can view the individual steps under Set- tings on Control Display, Brightness of Control Display, refer to page 79.
1 Selecting menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight moves
> Menu items shown in white can be selected by highlighting
2 Activating menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the function is carried out
3 Selecting menu item: refer to 1
4 Changing between fields:
> Briefly move the controller left, right, forward or back
> Release controller
> Active field appears lighter
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
iD ri
ve
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment: Radio, CD
> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of linked mobile phone, network search or no network
> "BMW Assist"*: Existing voice connection with a service from BMW Assist
2 Entertainment sound output off
3 Display for traffic information*, TI: Traffic information for the navigation sys- tem can be received and transmission is switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"* > Roaming active
5 Telephoning* possible if the mobile phone is logged-on in the vehicle
Mobile phone network reception strength, display dependent on mobile phone
6 Time
Other displays: The status information is temporarily hidden when there are Check Control instructions or inputs via the voice command system*.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the assistance window:
> The computer or the trip computer
> The arrow or map view with a navigation system*
> The current position
Selecting display 1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
A t
a g
la n
ce
21
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Switching assistance window off/on 1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.
To switch on, change to the assistance window and press the controller.
Switching Control Display off/on 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control- ler.
To switch on, press the controller.
Programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store and run certain functions of iDrive on the direct selection buttons:
> Destinations of navigation
> Telephone, phone numbers* > Entertainment:
> Radio station
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer* > AUX
The assignment of the direct selection buttons is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Saving function
Destinations of navigation 1. Select destination, e.g. in the destination
list or the address book.
2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.
Special features:
> With the destination guidance system and the map view started, the current destina- tion is stored.
> During destination entry via a map, the coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers 1. Enter the phone number or select it in a list
of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the "A - Z" list.
2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.
If a name is assigned to the phone number, the name will also be stored.
iD ri
ve
22
Entertainment In the Entertainment menu, the sound source currently heard, e.g. a radio station, is stored, regardless of the selection on the Control Dis- play.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta- tion or CD.
2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.
If the vehicle is equipped with two drives, the current track is stored for CDs with
compressed audio files.<
Running function Press the ... button.
The function is run immediately. This means, for example, that when a phone number is selected, the connection is also established, or when a navigation destination is called up, destination guidance is started.
Displaying button assignment You can display the assignment of the buttons by touching them with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.
Displaying short info Touch the ... button.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed.
Destination of navigation system
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information Touch and hold the ... button.
Deleting button assignments 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
A t
a g
la n
ce
23
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Voice command system
The concept The voice command system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out ever removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. This frees you of having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the voice command system in order to enable iden- tification of the spoken commands. To set the language of iDrive, refer to page 80.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal tell you that the voice command system can respond to com- mands.
2. Say the command. The command is displayed on the Control Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display when you can say additional commands. If no other commands are possible, then oper- ate the equipment via iDrive.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice command system.
V o
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
24
Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the button on the steering wheel or
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi- ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display. To have the system list the possible com- mands:
For example, if you have selected "CD", the system will read aloud the possible commands for operating the CD player and the CD changer*.
Opening help
Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:
Running functions directly with short commands With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu item is selected, refer to page 262.
Opening start menu
Example: selecting a track 1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment} The system says: {{Entertainment}}
4. {CD} The system says: {{CD drive switched on}}
6. Select a track, e.g.: {Track 1} The system says: {{Track 1}}
A t
a g
la n
ce
25
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Notes The mobile phone can also be operated with voice commands, refer to
page 217.<
For voice commands, bear the following in mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. This also applies to spelling when entering the destination.
> Always issue commands in the language of the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia- tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun- roof* closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
Each remote control contains a battery which is automatically charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice a year to keep the battery charged. For comfort access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.
Depending on which remote control is detected by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle, refer to Personal Profile, page 28.
Information on the required maintenance is also stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in remote control, page 243.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, refer to page 31
> Floor panel flap in cargo bay, refer to page 120
New remote controls To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new remote controls with an integrated key are available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Personal Profile
The concept You can set a number of functions of your BMW individually according to your preferences. Per- sonal Profile ensures that most of these set- tings are stored for the remote control currently in use without you having to do anything. When the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding remote control is detected and the settings stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW set to your own personal settings even if another person with his/her own remote control and settings has used the vehicle since the last time you drove it. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of three remote controls; with comfort access*, they are stored for two.
Personal Profile settings Details on the settings are provided on the specified pages.
> When unlocking with the remote control, either unlock only the driver's door or the entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or after starting off, refer to page 32
> Assigning the programmable buttonson the steering wheel, refer to page 51
C o
n tr
o ls
29
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis- play:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 79
> Measuring units for consumption, route/ distances, temperature, and pressure, refer to page 79
> Language on Control Display, refer to page 80
> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to page 79
> Date format, refer to page 79
> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Dis- tance Control*, refer to page 82
> Selection, brightness and position of dis- play in Head-Up Display*, refer to page 97
> Settings of automatic climate control, refer to page 104
> Positions of driver's seat, exterior mirrors, and steering wheel*, refer to page 44
> With Adaptive Drive*, last selected chassis and suspension tuning setting, refer to page 88
> Audio sources, volume and tone settings, refer to page 161
> Radio, displaying stored stations, refer to page 164
> Telephone, setting volume, refer to pages 212, 218
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 100, and daytime running lamps*, refer to page 100
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 64
> With rear view camera*, selection of func- tions, refer to page 83, and type of display, refer to page 85
> With programmable memory/direct selec- tion buttons, selection of stored functions, refer to page 21
Central locking system
The concept The central locking system is ready for opera- tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Liftgate
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside > via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access* via the door handles
At the same time, the anti-theft system is also operated. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are also switched on and off with the remote control. The alarm systemis armed/dis- armed at the same time. You can find more detailed information on the alarm systemon page 35.
Operating from inside Via the button for central locking, refer to page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In an accident of sufficient severity, the central locking system automatically unlocks the vehi- cle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
30
Unlocking Press the button. This unlocks the vehicle.
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con- troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
Comfort opening Press and hold down the button. The win- dows and the glass sunroof* are opened.
Locking Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special knowledge.<
Switching on interior lamps With vehicle locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode* You can also trigger the alarm system in case of danger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switch off alarm: press any button.
Unlocking liftgate Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The liftgate will open slightly, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the liftgate pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening. To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A previously locked liftgate is also locked again after closing.<
C o
n tr
o ls
31
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges. Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window.<
Setting confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller. The signal is activated.
Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. Should the remote control fail to operate due to interference of this kind, unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using the remote control, then the battery is discharged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 28.
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:
FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2
Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and
> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing: Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special knowledge.<
When unlocking 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the remaining doors and the liftgate.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
32
Convenience operation You can also operate the windows and the glass sunroof* from the driver's door lock.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Rotating the
key back into the initial position stops the movement.<
Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can turn a key all the way to the right or left in the door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing: From inside
With the front doors closed, this button serves to unlock or lock doors and the liftgate, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
You can also set the situations in which the vehicle is locked.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.
8. Press the controller. The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
C o
n tr
o ls
33
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing* To close the doors, merely push them gently. The closing process will then be carried out automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Liftgate During opening, the liftgate pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the liftgate or the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second: The liftgate opens somewhat.
Opening height You can open the liftgate to 2 heights.
Unlock the liftgate and lift it up into the lower position.
To open all the way, pull the liftgate down approx. 12 in/30 cm from the lower position and then let go.
Adjusting opening height You can set the liftgate to open immediately into the upper position or to initially only open to the lower position.
1. Open the liftgate all the way.
2. For the lower position, position 1: Rotate the sleeves of the liftgate supports to the right until they stop, refer to arrows 1.
For the upper position, position 2: Rotate the sleeves of the liftgate supports to the left until they stop, refer to arrows 2.
With automatic liftgate operation* you can set the opening height using iDrive,
refer to page 34.<
Opening manually In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. From inside the cargo bay, use a screw- driver to push out the cover 1 on the liftgate.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
34
2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the arrow.
3. Open the liftgate and press the cover back into place.
The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is closed.
Closing Make sure that the closing path of the lift- gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the liftgate make it easier to pull down.
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges. Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window.<
Automatic liftgate operation*
Adjusting opening height You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Tailgate" and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller. The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
Opening liftgate Before opening the liftgate, make sure that it is not laden with additional weight
such as snow or ice; otherwise, the liftgate may unexpectedly close.<
The liftgate opens automatically when you:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift- gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Press the button in the center console.
> Press and hold the button on the remote control.
C o
n tr
o ls
35
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
To stop the opening process:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift- gate.
> Press and hold the button on the remote control.
> Press the button on the inside of the lift- gate.
> Press the button on the center console again.
The opening process is interrupted if you set the vehicle in motion.<
Closing liftgate Make sure that the closing path of the lift- gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The liftgate closes automatically when you press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
> Press the button on the inside of the lift- gate.
> Press the button on the outside of the lift- gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the vehicle into motion.<
The liftgate also closes automatically without the press of a button if it is
encumbered by additional weight of about 11 lbs./5 kg, such as when laden with snow or ice.<
Alarm system
The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the liftgate is opened
> To movements in the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 36
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by the alarm system:
> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching onthe hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
The liftgate can also be opened with the system armed using the button on the remote con- trol, refer to page 30. When the liftgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again.
Switching off alarm > Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
36
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the interior rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the doors, hood or liftgate are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec- onds. However, the interior motion sensor is not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted into the ignition lock, however for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof* must be completely closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time.
This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:
> In stacking garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains, by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.
Comfort access* Comfort access enables you to access your vehicle without having to hold the remote con- trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the related remote control in the immediate vicinity or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func- tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing
> Opening liftgate
> Starting engine
Functional requirements > The vehicle can only be unlocked if the
vehicle detects that the remote control car- ried is not located in the vehicle interior.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle detects that the remote control is located in the vehicle.
C o
n tr
o ls
37
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Comparison with ordinary remote control You can control the functions mentioned previ- ously with the comfort access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control. Therefore, please familiarize yourself with the information on opening and closing beginning on page 28 beforehand.
The special features when using comfort access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows or the glass sun-
roof*, the system is checking whether a remote control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat opening or closing if necessary.<
Unlocking
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking Touch the area highlighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but- ton.
Please make sure that all electronic sys- tems/consumers are switched off before
locking to save the battery.<
Comfort closing Hold a finger or the back of a hand on the sur- face, arrow 2.
The windows and the glass sunroof* are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle immediately stops the closing process.<
Opening liftgate Press the button on the liftgate. This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi-
cle after the liftgate is closed, then the liftgate opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 56.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal, otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion if a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.
As long as no remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off if no door has been opened.
Switching off engine > Remote control not in ignition lock:
After switching off the engine, the transmis- sion is automatically switched into trans- mission position P.
> Remote control in ignition lock: If transmission position N is engaged, the transmission remains in this position after the engine is switched off.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
38
Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.
Malfunction The comfort access function may malfunction due to local radio waves. Then open or close the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key. To start the engine following this, insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up when an attempt is made to start the engine: starting the
engine is not possible. The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take along the remote control into the vehicle or have it checked. Insert another remote control into the ignition lock if necessary.
The warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up when the engine is running: the remote control is no
longer in the vehicle. After switching off the engine, the engine can only be started again within approx. 10 seconds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up and a message appears on the Control Display:
Replace the battery of the remote control.
Replacing battery The remote control for comfort access contains a battery which must be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con- trol, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Dispose of used batteries at a collection point or at your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<
Windows To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the windows and injure them- selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed.
> Press switch beyond resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening move- ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.
C o
n tr
o ls
39
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Separate switches for the rear windows are located in the rear.
For information on using convenience opera- tion at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort access, refer to page 37.
After switching off ignition You can still operate the windows with the remote control removed or the ignition switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system If the closing force rises beyond a predefined threshold during closing, the system will stop moving the window prior to lowering it again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside or if, for example, ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro- ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold. The pinch protection system is limited and the window opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold again within approx. 4 seconds. The window closes without the pinch pro- tection system.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, by chil- dren, for example. The LED lights up when this safety feature is activated.
Always press the safety switch when chil- dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to injuries.<
Glass sunroof, electric The glass sunroof is ready for operation when the ignition is switched on, refer to page 56.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the roof and injure them- selves.<
Raising Press the switch. The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid- ing visor opens slightly.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
40
Do not use force to close the sliding visor with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam- aged.<
Opening, closing > Slide the switch back to the resistance
point. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open together as long as you continue to hold the switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the resistance point. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
You can close the glass sunroof in a similar manner by sliding the switch forward. The slid- ing visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on using convenience opera- tion with the remote control or at the door lock, refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on convenience closing with comfort access, refer to page 37.
Automatic opening and closing Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance point.
The following movements are also automatic:
> With the sunroof open, press the switch: The sunroof is opened all the way.
> With the sunroof raised, briefly press the switch in the opening direction: The sunroof is opened all the way.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort position In the comfort position, the sunroof is not com- pletely open; this reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If you wish, you can continue the motion by actu- ating the switch.
After switching off ignition You can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system If the glass sunroof meets with resistance from about the middle of the roof opening when clos- ing or when lowering from the raised position, the closing process is interrupted and the glass sunroof opens all the way.
Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would con- tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection system When there is danger outside the vehicle, pro- ceed as follows:
1. Slide the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection system is limited and the sunroof opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.
Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power loss, the sunroof may only respond to the raise command. Then have the system initialized. BMW recommends that you have this work carried out by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
C o
n tr
o ls
41
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Moving manually* In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover panel down, arrow 2, and remove.
3. Release and disconnect the motor plug. This significantly reduces the effort required for the manual movement.
4. Take the Allen wrench* from its bracket in the onboard tool kit, refer to page 245, and insert it into the opening provided. Move the glass sunroof in the desired direction.
5. Reconnect the plug.
6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel, arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.
A d
ju st
in g
42
Adjusting
Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the interaction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seat position plays an important role in an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the fol- lowing section.
For additional information on transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 53.
Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms in the event of airbag deployment. No one and nothing is to come between the air- bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Make sure that occupants do not rest their head on the side or head airbag, otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.
For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 95.
Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 46.
Safety belts Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos- sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in the upper body area periodically to readjust the tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the restraint of the safety belt. If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the larger backrest half must be locked, refer to page 120, otherwise the center safety belt has no restraining action.<
Safety belts, refer to page 47.
C o
n tr
o ls
43
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Seats
Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust or calibrate your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat
could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. Never adjust manually adjustable seats while the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the restrain- ing effect of these seats during accidents could be reduced. Also on the passenger side, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally pro- vided by the belt.<
Also observe the information on damage to safety belts on page 47 and on the height of the head restraints on page 46.
Adjusting manually* To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on page 42.<
Pull the lever and slide the seat to the desired position. After you release the lever, move the seat forward or backward slightly so that it engages fully.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the longitudinal direction.
Adjusting electrically To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on page 42.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest
A d
ju st
in g
44
Differs depending on seat:
1 Backrest
2 Height
Additional depending on seat:
1 Backrest width* 2 Shoulder support* 3 Thigh support* 4 Lumbar support*
Backrest width* The width of the backrest can be changed with the side wings to adjust the side support to your own needs.
Shoulder support* This also supports the back in the shoulder area, provides a relaxed sitting position and helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the distance of the head restraint from the back of the seat occupant's head.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press front or rear section of switch.
> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or lower section of switch.
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory* You can store and request two different posi- tions for the driver's seat and passenger seat*, exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the backrest width and lum- bar support is not stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer to page 56.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel positions.
C o
n tr
o ls
45
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Press the button: The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: The LED goes out.
The positions of the driver's seat, the exte- rior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Calling up automatically You can choose when the stored positions of the driver's seat, exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are activated.
> Calling up when unlocking vehicle
> Calling up when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting calling up automatically iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con- troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".
9. Press the controller.
Deactivating calling up automatically Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Calling up manually Do not call up a position from the memory while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently: press the button again; the LED goes out.
A d
ju st
in g
46
Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove the head restraints if the respective seat is not occupied. Reinstall the head restraints before transporting passen- gers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot provide its protective function.<
Active front head restraints In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient severity, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Other- wise, there is no assurance that the active head restraint will perform its protective function and it is not possible to take advantage of its injury- reducing potential in the event of a rear-end collision. Have the active head restraints reset after they are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this work carried out only at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
Removal and installation of the front head restraints should be performed by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Front seats: height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the head restraints electrically.
Front seats: adjusting distance from the back of the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and slide the head- rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head restraint.<
Comfort seat* You can adjust the distance from the back of the seat occupant's head using the shoulder sup- port, refer to page 44.
C o
n tr
o ls
47
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Adjusting side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.
Safety belts To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on page 42.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Fastening Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. A message also appears on the Control Display.
Please check whether the safety belt is cor- rectly fastened.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the passenger seat.
Releasing 1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 43.
Damage to safety belts In the event of loads caused by accidents or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any child restraint systems, and have the belt anchor points checked. Only have this work carried out at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
Belt-force limiter The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driver's seat is dependent on the position of the driver's seat.
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a corresponding message is displayed on the Control Display.
Calibrating driver's seat The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage also appears on the Control Dis- play. Please calibrate the driver's
seat.
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It briefly moves toward the front in the pro- cess.
3. Set the desired seating position again.
A d
ju st
in g
48
The calibration is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. Should this message continue to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear even after repeated calibration, have the sys- tem checked as soon as possible.
Never carry out calibration while the vehi- cle is moving, as this can cause accidents.
Make sure that no persons or objects become wedged during the calibration process, as this can cause injuries or damage.<
Seat heating*
Front
The temperature setting progresses one step through its control sequence each time you press the button. The maximum temperature is supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press the button longer.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat- tery. The LEDs remain lit.
Temperature distribution* The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press the controller.
4. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Driver" or "Passenger".
5. Turn the controller. The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating; without temperature distribution.
Active seat ventilation* and seat heating*
Front
1 Seat heating
2 Active seat ventilation
C o
n tr
o ls
49
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the temperature or ventilation position. The LED in the respective button lights up.
The temperature or ventilation levels are shown on the Control Display.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: press button 1 or 2 longer.
Temperature distribution The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Driver's seat climate" or "Passen- ger's seat climate" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu- tion. The setting is applied.
Heated rear seats Operation similar to front seat heating; without temperature distribution, refer to page 48.
Active seat*
The seat cushion is actively varied by alter- nately raising and lowering the right and left half of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten- sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights up.
The action of the system is reduced and if need be, switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LED remains lit.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat cushion have returned to their initial position.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger's side is more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance of following traffic based on what you see in the mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased risk of accident.<
A d
ju st
in g
50
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto- matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out* Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir- ror and steering wheel memory on page 44.
Adjusting manually The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: Press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out* Pressing button 3 allows you to fold the mirrors in and out again up to a speed of approx. 12 mph/20 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mirrors that have been manually folded in back into the correct position. Folded in mirrors fold out again at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating Below a certain outdoor temperature, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when the motor is running or the ignition is switched on.
Tilting down passenger-side exterior mirror automatic curb monitor*
Activating 1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage transmission position R. The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat on the passenger's side. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle such as a curb when park- ing, etc.
Deactivating Slide switch into the passenger side mirror position, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi- cles at night, turn the knob.
C o
n tr
o ls
51
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in the inside rearview mirror, one on the front and one on the back.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells clean and do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 44.
Easy entry/exit* To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button. When the steering wheel heater is switched on, the LED in the button lights up.
Programmable buttons on steering wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
A d
ju st
in g
52
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.
A list of different functions appears:
> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice instructions for the navigation system*
> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanently shutting off outside air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control* on page 106
> "Mute on / off" Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off" Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"* Display/hide phone book or last list of stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source" Changes audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the controller.
6. Select the button if necessary and press the controller.
You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.
Operating function Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:
> To switch voice instructions on/off: Hold the button down.
> To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button.
C o
n tr
o ls
53
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Transporting children safely
The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening the doors.<
Children always in rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or less than 5 ft/150 cm tall should only be
transported in the rear, in child restraint sys- tems that correspond to their age, weight and height. Otherwise there is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.
Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags on the passen- ger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury for the child if the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 95.
Installing child restraint systems
Follow the child restraint system manu- facturer's instructions for selection,
installation, and use of child restraint systems. Otherwise, the degree of protection may be reduced.<
On front passenger seat After mounting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig- gered.<
Backrest width* The backrest width adjustment of the front passenger seat must be completely
open. After installing the child's seat, no mem- ory position may be called up; otherwise, the stability of the child's seat on the front passen- ger seat is reduced.<
1. Open backrest width adjustment com- pletely, refer to page 44.
2. Install child's seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked to prevent them from extending in order to allow child restraint systems to be attached.
Locking safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull taut against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.
T ra
n sp
o rt
in g
c h
ild re
n s
af el
y
54
Unlocking safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com- pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil- dren.
Follow the system manufacturer's instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint systems; otherwise, their protective function may be reduced.<
Before attaching the child's seat, pull the belt away from the region of the child restraint fixing system.
Make sure that the LATCH mounts have properly clicked into place and that the
child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action may be reduced.<
The mounts for the LATCH anchors are located at the points indicated by the arrows.
Child restraint system with tether strap Only use the top tether mounting points to secure child restraint systems, other-
wise the mounting points could be damaged.<
For child restraint systems with tether strap, there are two additional attachment points on the back of the rear seat backrests, refer to arrows.
Placement of tether strap Make sure that the tether strap is not routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the attachment point; other- wise, the belt cannot properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Tether strap hook
4 Mounting point
5 Backrest
6 Tether strap of child restraint system
C o
n tr
o ls
55
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
When using the cargo bay cover, route the tether strap through between the rear seat backrest and the cargo bay cover.
Attaching tether strap to the rear seat backrest 1. Route tether strap over the middle of the
headrest.
2. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting point with the hook.
3. Pull tether strap taut until it compresses the cushion of the headrest, thus preventing the tether strap from sliding off.
On trips
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors: The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for power windows Always press the safety switch for the power windows, refer to page 39, when children are riding in the rear of the vehicle.
D ri
vi n
g
56
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock. Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation.
Comfort access* With comfort access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock in exceptional cases, refer to page 36.
Removing remote control from ignition lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press it in as far as possible to release the locking device. The ignition is switched off if it was still switched on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Pressing the Start/Stop button with the brake pedal depressed starts the
engine.<
Radio readiness Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The time and outside tempera- ture are displayed in the instrument panel.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
> with comfort access* by touching the sen- sitive surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 37
Ignition on All electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument panel, refer to page 68.
Please switch off the ignition and the electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to save the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator lamps, warning lamps, and displays in the instrument panel go out.
C o
n tr
o ls
57
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Starting engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, as such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always engage transmission position N or P and set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine speed.
The engine starts when you depress the brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag- ing the starter for a certain period and automat- ically disengaging it as soon as the engine starts.
Switching off engine When leaving the vehicle, always take along the remote control.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; otherwise, the vehicle could roll.<
Procedure 1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.
Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:
1. With comfort access*: insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake or deactivate Automatic Hold.
5. Switch off the engine.
Transmission position P will be engaged:
> automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> if you remove the remote control from the ignition lock
Parking brake
The concept Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan- ical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
You can use the parking brake in two ways:
> manually, by pulling and pushing the button
> automatically, by activating Automatic Hold, refer to page 58
D ri
vi n
g
58
With the engine stopped, the parking brake acts on the rear wheels via an electromechanical system. When the engine is running, the park- ing brake acts on the disk brakes of the front and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.
Setting manually
Pull button. The parking brake is set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up red. The parking brake is set.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The remote control does not have to be inserted into the ignition lock for the parking brake to be set.
While driving If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to set the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, pull on the button longer. The vehicle continues to brake forcefully for as long as you pull on the button.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up red, a chime sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a stop, i.e., down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/ 3 km/h or below, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing manually
Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
When leaving the vehicle, always take along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking brake, for example.<
Automatic Hold
The concept This function assists you as you drive by auto- matically setting and releasing the parking brake, e.g. when you are stopped at a traffic sig- nal or in stop-and-go traffic. When Automatic Hold is activated, the vehicle is automatically held in place when standing. When driving up inclines, the system prevents your vehicle from rolling backward in an undes- ired way.
After the engine is started, the system can be activated and deactivated at any time the driver's seat is occupied until the next time the engine is switched off.
C o
n tr
o ls
59
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Activating
Press the button. The LED in the button lights up and the indication AUTO H appears in the instrument panel. Automatic Hold is activated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, the indicator light in the instru- ment panel also lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Deactivating Press the button again, the LED in the button and the indication AUTO H in the instrument panel go out. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to page 58, Automatic Hold is automatically deac- tivated.
Driving With Automatic Hold activated, the vehicle is automatically prevented from rolling after it comes to a stop.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
If the transmission is in a drive position, simply press on the gas pedal to begin driving. The
brake is automatically released and the indica- tor lamp goes out.
Before driving into the car wash, deacti- vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the park-
ing brake will be automatically set after stop- ping and the vehicle can no longer roll.<
Parking If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold and you switch off the motor, the parking brake is automatically set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel changes from green to red.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The parking brake is not set if you have already switched off the engine while the
vehicle is rolling to a stop. Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
You can manually release the parking brake even after switching off the motor as long as the remote control remains in the ignition lock, refer to page 58. Use this function in car washes, for example.
When leaving the vehicle, always take along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking brake, for example.<
For your safety Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated when:
> the engine is switched off
> no one is detected in the driver's seat when the engine is running
> the vehicle is braked to a stop during driv- ing.
In the instrument panel, the indicator lamp changes from green to red and the indication AUTO H goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
D ri
vi n
g
60
Before you start to drive, either release the parking brake manually, refer to page 58, or reactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 59.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, shift the selector lever into posi-
tion P of the automatic transmission and make sure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.<
Malfunction If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel chock, if you leave the vehicle.
Releasing parking brake manually In the event of an electrical power loss or elec- trical malfunction, you can release the parking brake manually.
Before manually releasing the parking brake and each time you park the vehicle
without setting the parking brake, make sure that the automatic transmission is in position P, refer to page 62. Be sure to pay attention to the information in the instrument panel. In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a steep slope.<
If it becomes necessary to also release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission manually, follow this sequence:
1. If necessary, start by releasing the parking brake manually.
2. Then release the automatic transmission's transmission lock manually, refer to page 63.
Jump starting and towing, refer to information starting on page 253.
Releasing 1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and the warning triangle* if necessary. Close the bracket of the warning triangle.
3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer to page 245, at the releasing point.
4. Firmly pull the releasing tool upward against the mechanical resistance, refer to arrow, until a considerable increase in force is felt and the parking brake is then clearly heard to release.
5. Stow the releasing tool, warning triangle* and first-aid kit* and close the left side panel in the cargo bay.
Only have a malfunction corrected by the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel. If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation.<
Following manual release, the actual sta- tus of the parking brake may deviate from
that displayed by the indicator lamp.<
Operation after interruptions in power supply
The parking brake can only be used again if it was manually released due to an inter-
ruption in the supply of electrical power. Other- wise the operation of the parking brake is not ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle roll- ing despite the parking brake being set.<
Procedure 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again.
C o
n tr
o ls
61
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Any noises which occur are normal. Start-up may take several seconds.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 62.
Transmission positions P R N D M/S +
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.<
Displays in instrument panel
P R N D S1 through S6 M1 through M6
The transmission position and the currently engaged gear are displayed.
Engaging transmission position > You can only engage transmission posi-
tions D, R or N when the engine is running.
> With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise the shift command will not be executed: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.<
Shifting into D, R, N
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired direction, beyond a resistance point if neces- sary. When shifting out of P or into R, simulta- neously press button 1.
The engaged transmission position is displayed on the selector lever.
The selector lever immediately returns to the center position when released.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Also observe the additional information on the automatic transmission.
The transmission automatically shifts into park if you release the driver's safety belt
and open the driver's door with the engine run- ning while in reverse or drive.<
R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts into transmission position R. To deactivate the interlock, press the release button 1.
D ri
vi n
g
62
P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as you switch off the engine unless N is
engaged and on vehicles with comfort access the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock, refer to page 56.<
N Neutral Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car washes. The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off whenever you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. This function is used, for example, in a car wash, refer to page 57. After approx. 30 minutes P is auto- matically engaged.<
D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are available. Under normal operating conditions, the fuel consumption is lowest when driving in position D.
Kick-down The kick-down mode provides maximum accel- eration. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the increased resistance at full throttle.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Press selector lever out of transmission position D toward the left: The Sport program is activated and S1 through S6 appears in the instrument panel. This posi-
tion is recommended for a performance-ori- ented driving style.
To use the automatic function again, press the selector lever to the right into position D.
Changing gears using selector lever When the selector lever is pressed forward or back, the manual mode is activated and the Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument panel shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru- ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Changing gears using shifting paddles on steering wheel The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly change gears since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> In automatic mode D, if you shift using the shifting paddles on the steering wheel, then the system switches into manual mode.
> If, after a certain amount of time, you neither shift with the shifting paddles nor acceler- ate, then the system switches back into automatic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S selected, the manual mode remains
active.<
> Upshifting: pull on one of the shifting pad- dles, arrows +.
C o
n tr
o ls
63
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Downshifting: press on one of the shifting paddles, arrows .
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru- ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Manually releasing and engaging transmission lock
In case of a power failure, e.g. when the battery is drained or disconnected, or an
electrical malfunction, the transmission lock must be manually released, as otherwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.<
Step on the brake when manually releas- ing the transmission lock; otherwise,
there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
The transmission lock should only be released for towing. Reengage the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination.
If it also becomes necessary to manually release the parking brake, follow this sequence:
1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
2. Manually release the parking brake, refer to page 60.
3. Manually release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission.
Releasing 1. Slide back the cover of the cup holder and
remove the floor mat on the bar between the cup holders, arrow 1.
2. Open the cover in the bottom of the cup holder with the releasing tool from the onboard tool kit, page 245, refer to arrow 2.
3. If necessary, unlock the lock* with the inte- grated key of the remote control, refer to page 28, and remove it.
4. Insert the releasing tool into the opening, arrow 3.
5. Turn the releasing tool as far as possible, arrow 4, and then press downward and leave it in. The transmission lock is released.
Engage the transmission lock after park- ing the vehicle at its destination. Other-
wise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
Locking
1. Pull out the releasing tool. The transmission lock is engaged again.
2. If necessary, insert the lock* and lock it.
3. Close the cover in the bottom of the cup holder and lay in the mat again.
4. Close the cover of the cup holder and stow the releasing tool.
Information on jump starting and towing, from page 253.
D ri
vi n
g
64
Turn signals/headlamp flasher/high beams
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever up to the resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<
Signaling briefly Press lever to resistance point and hold for as long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation Press the lever up to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Washer/wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Rain sensor activation/deactivation
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 5 Adjusting sensitivity of rain sensor
Switching on wipers Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.
Normal wiper speed Press once. The system reverts to operation in the intermit- tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
C o
n tr
o ls
65
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system reverts to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor The wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the intensity of the rain. The rain sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Rain sensor activation
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.
Adjusting sensitivity of rain sensor Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Rain sensor deactivation Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes- ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps* Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the windshield and activates the wipers for a brief period.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles Both windshield washer nozzles are automati- cally heated with the engine running or the igni- tion switched on.
Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original container out of reach of children. Otherwise, there is the danger of bodily injury. Always observe the instructions for use provided on the containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid Only add washer fluid with the engine cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a dan- ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.<
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- voir.
Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix the washer fluid before filling.<
D ri
vi n
g
66
Capacity approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept The cruise control with a braking function is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/ 30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set using the lever mounted on the steering column. To keep the specified speed constant, the system brakes if the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade.
Do not use the cruise control under driv- ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing speed and maintaining or increas- ing
2 Storing speed and maintaining or decreas- ing
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining current speed Briefly press, arrow 1, or briefly pull, arrow 2 lever.
The speed currently being driven is stored and maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument panel.
The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades if the engine output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade, the system lightly brakes the vehicle.
Increasing speed Repeatedly press the lever up to or beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is set.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis- tance point, the speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed increases by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.
Accelerating with lever Accelerate slightly:
Press the lever up to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate more rapidly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.
Reducing speed Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis- tance point, the desired speed decreases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
C o
n tr
o ls
67
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The system stores the setting and maintains the set speed.
Deactivating cruise control Briefly press the lever up or down, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:
> when braking
> when transmission position N is engaged
> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated
> when HDC is activated
> when the parking brake is set
> when driving stability control systems inter- vene
Accelerating does not deactivate the cruise control. After releasing the accelerator pedal, the stored speed is reached and maintained again.
Warning lamp The warning lamp lights up if the cruise control has been deactivated automatically, e.g. by a control inter-
vention of the DSC. A message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming stored speed Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
With the ignition switched off, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be resumed again.
Displays in instrument panel
1 Stored desired speed
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument panel display, it is possi-
ble that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met.<
Malfunction The warning lamp lights up if the sys- tem has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. Detailed informa-
tion is provided from page 75.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
68
Everything under control
Odometer, outside temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument panel
2 Time, outside temperature, and date
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument panel > With ignition switched on
Press button: Resetting trip odometer
Press the button for approx. 5 seconds: Displaying service requirements, refer to page 72
> With ignition switched off
Press button: Briefly displaying time, outside temperature and odometer
Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or6 for the outside temperature, refer to page 79.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Time, date, outside temperature From radio readiness the outside temperature and the time are displayed.
Setting the time, refer to page 78.
Retrieving date
Press the button on turn signal lever upward; the date appears.
To set the date, refer to page 79.
Pressing the button upward or downward sev- eral times changes the display between clock, outside temperature, date, and Check Control messages, refer to page 76.
Outside temperature warning If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. There is an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/ +36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the shade, otherwise there is an increased accident risk.<
Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: Press button 1 in the instrument panel with the ignition switched on.
When vehicle is parked To briefly display the time, outside temperature and mileage after the remote control has been removed from the ignition lock: Press button 1 in the instrument panel.
C o
n tr
o ls
69
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Tachometer
Do not operate the engine with the needle in the red overspeed zone of the gauge, refer to arrow. At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 242.
Engine oil temperature
When the engine is at operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 1707/806 and approx. 2507/1206.
When the engine oil temperature is too high, a warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 22.5 US gal/ 85 liters. You will find information on refueling on page 230.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve After the reserve quantity has been reached, a message briefly appears on the Control Display; the remaining range is shown in the computer. Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
70
Computer
Displays in instrument panel
To display the information, press the BC button on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Dynamic Performance Control, refer to page 87
Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is projected based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/ 30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine stopped are not included in the calculations of average speed.
To reset average speed: press the BC button on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the BC button on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
For different routes You can display the average speed and average consumption for two different routes on the Control Display, refer to the following and to Trip computer*.
Displays on Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive. For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and remaining distance:
> Entering a distance manually in the com- puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation system*, refer to page 136.
> Cruising range
C o
n tr
o ls
71
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values You can reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con- troller again.
Entering a distance manually 1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically preset during the destination guidance of the navigation sys- tem*.
Trip computer* The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a vacation trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Starting or stopping the trip computer, or reset- ting all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Display options You can display the computer or the trip com- puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
72
3. Press the controller.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for the next maintenance are displayed briefly with the ignition switched on.
To determine the extent of maintenance required, you can also display the remaining distance or the service date individually in the instrument panel.
1. With the ignition switched on, press the button in the instrument panel, refer to page 68, for approx. 5 seconds until the service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the individual service requirement items.
C o
n tr
o ls
73
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Displaying service requirements
1 Button for selecting display
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Legally mandated inspections* 5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of the displayed maintenance items can vary. First the data for the next main- tenance are displayed.
Additional information You can select a display of more detailed infor- mation on the maintenance scope on the Con- trol Display. For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
74
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
The display shows a list of selected service and maintenance procedures, as well as legally mandated inspections.
You can request more detailed information on every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally mandated inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 79; otherwise, the effec- tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
C o
n tr
o ls
75
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Check Control
The concept The Check Control monitors functions in the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- function in the monitored systems. This kind of Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument panel, and if necessary an acoustic signal and text mes- sages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.
means that a Check Control message has been generated. The symbol continues to be visible even when the Check Control message disappears after a short time. The warning lamps and text messages are stored and can be displayed later, also refer to page 76.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con- trol Display explain the meaning of the dis- played indicator and warning lamps.
You can display additional information on most Check Control messages later, e.g. on the cause of the malfunction and on corresponding need for action, see below.
In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor- mation is displayed immediately when the related lamp lights up.
Exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever up or down.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
76
Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are displayed in succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
Displaying stored Check Control messages
1. Press the button on the turn signal lever downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored Check Control messages appear in the dis- play. "CHECK OK" is shown if no messages are present. Check Control messages are accompanied by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional mes- sages, the time and outside temperature, or the date.
Displaying additional information later iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con- troller.
To exit the display: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Indication of malfunction urgency
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the stored Check Control messages are also dis- played with the following symbols:
No malfunctions are present in the moni- tored systems.
Malfunctions are present in the moni- tored systems. Depending on the mal- function, supplementary information is shown on the Control Display.
C o
n tr
o ls
77
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The symbols also indicate the status of the ser- vice requirements display, refer to page 74.
Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message indicates when you have reached this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed value and press the con- troller.
6. Turn the controller to set the limit.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The limit is automatically activated.
Applying your current speed as limit Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system applies your current speed as the limit.
Activating limit Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is automatically activated.
Stopwatch iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting > Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.
Taking an intermediate time reading Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.<
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
78
Settings on Control Display iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
Setting time 1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
2. Move the controller once to the front if nec- essary to change to the first field from the top.
3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.
Making settings 1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
C o
n tr
o ls
79
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Switching on hour signal* You will hear tones just before each full hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Setting time format 1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Setting date 1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
2. Select "Set date " and press the controller. The first section of the date display is high- lighted, in this case the month.
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.
Changing date format 1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Brightness of Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the controller to the right to select "Display".
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Units of measure You can change the units of measure for con- sumption, distances, temperature and pres- sure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
80
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Units" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select the menu item to be set and press the controller.
7. Select the desired unit of measure and press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Language on Control Display iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the con- troller. You can change the language of the text displays.
7. Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Volume of warning tones* On vehicles equipped with a single drive, you can increase or decrease the volume of the warning tones, e.g. for the safety belt reminder, compared to the entertainment sound output. The warning tones have a specified minimum and maximum volume that cannot be dropped below or exceeded.
1. Select "Tone / Volume" and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Volume settings" and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select "Warning tones" and press the controller.
4. If necessary, change to the right-hand field and turn the controller. The setting is applied.
C o
n tr
o ls
81
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept The PDC assists you when you are parking. Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert you to the approach of an object from behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning first sounds for the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor- ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth- erwise the physical circumstances would mean that the system warning was too late.<
Automatic activation Whenever the engine is running or the ignition is on, each time you move the selector lever into position R, the PDC system is activated after approx. 1 second.
Wait this short period before driving off.
Manual activation
Press the button, the LED lights up.
Manual deactivation Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Automatic deactivation After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is switched off and the LED goes out. You can reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones When nearing an object, the position is corre- spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the dis- tance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Adjusting You can adjust the volume of the warning tones if the vehicle is equipped with a single drive, refer to page 80.
Malfunction The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal- functioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean- ers for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
82
PDC with visual warning* You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already shown there before a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear view cam- era, refer to Displays on page 85.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Maneuvering aids" is selected and press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until "View selection" is selected and press the controller.
7. Select "PDC in main window only" and press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
System limits Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system's detection of objects is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measure- ment, such as those encountered with tow bars and trailer couplings, thin or wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects already displayed, e.g. the curb, can also disappear from the detection area of the sensors again before or after a con- tinuous tone already sounds. Higher, protrud- ing objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. For this reason, drive with care; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury or property dam- age. Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
C o
n tr
o ls
83
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Rear view camera*
The concept The rear view camera in the liftgate displays the area behind your vehicle on the Control Display.
Also check the traffic situation around the vehicle during parking and maneuvering
with direct vision, as otherwise danger of an accident could result, for example, from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the rear view camera.<
Switching on
Automatically With the engine running, shift into reverse.
If the image of the Park Distance Control PDC appears in the Control Display, you
can switch the image to the rear view camera, refer to Displays on page 85.<
Manually
Press the button. PDC is activated at the same time, refer to page 81.
If the image of the Park Distance Control PDC appears in the Control Display, you
can switch the image to the rear view camera, refer to Displays on page 85.<
Switching off
Automatically When driving forward at over approx. 12 mph/ 20 km/h or after driving approx. 164 ft/50 m.
Manually Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Driver assistance functions The following functions can improve the effect of the rear view camera depending on the situa- tion.
They can only be activated when the liftgate is completely closed.
Pathway lines The pathway lines are shown in the picture of the rear view camera. They help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneu- vering on level roads.
To estimate the space required, turn the steer- ing wheel so that the pathway lines guide into the parking space or the maneuvering area you have chosen.
The pathway lines are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.
Turning lines The static turning lines are displayed in the pic- ture of the rear view camera and show you the course of the smallest possible turning circle on level roads.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
84
Using pathway and turning lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
guide within the limits of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the pathway lines cover the corresponding turning lines.
This results in a steering wheel position that makes full use of the smallest possible turning circle of the vehicle when parking.
Virtual camera panning The displayed picture area is dependent on the current speed: At low speeds, the camera view is panned toward the street, and at higher speeds toward the horizon. This enables the currently relevant picture area to be shown enlarged on the Control Display.
To activate the virtual camera panning, select the camera view "Camera view: full screen", refer to Displays on page 85.
Obstacle marking Spatially shaped markings are shown in the pic- ture of the rear view camera. Their stepped col- ors correspond to the markings of the Park Dis- tance Control and support you in estimating the distance to the object shown.
The obstacle marking is deactivated when driv- ing in reverse from approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
Activating driver assistance functions The driver assistance functions can be active at the same time. The zoom function for trailer towing can only be activated individually with the rear view camera switched on.
With rear view camera switched on iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select the desired function and press the controller.
You can also adjust the brightness of the cam- era view.
With rear view camera switched off 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Maneuvering aids" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired functions and press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
C o
n tr
o ls
85
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Displays You can have the picture from the rear view camera displayed in several formats and in combination with the PDC Park Distance Con- trol, refer to page 82. In addition, you also have the option of display- ing only the PDC Park Distance Control.
> "Camera picture and PDC" The rear view camera picture is shown in the main window of the Control Display.
> "Camera view: full screen" The picture of the rear view camera is shown on the entire Control Display.
> "Camera view: main window" The picture of the rear view camera is shown in the main window of the Control Display.
> "PDC in main window only" PDC is shown in the main window of the Control Display.
Selecting displays 1. Select "Maneuvering aids" and press the
controller, refer to Driver assistance func- tions.
2. Turn the controller until "View selection" is selected and press the controller.
3. Select the desired display and press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Setting brightness You can set the brightness of the camera view with the rear view camera switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.
3. Set the desired brightness.
Cleaning rear view camera
The lens of the rear view camera is located on the liftgate.
The picture quality of the rear view camera may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
The lens is automatically heated in case of frost.
Driving stability control systems Your BMW is equipped with an extended array of systems designed to enhance and maintain vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.
ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 127.
CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking during curves or when braking during a lane change, driving stability and steer- ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
86
Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when starting off and accelerating. The system also identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions in the indi- vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac- tion Control and DSC are deactivated together. Stabilizing interventions are now not carried out.
A message appears on the Control Display. Please note any supplementary information that appears there.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC Press the button; the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.
For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamps light up: DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:
> When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow, sand or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains*
Activating DTC
Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up.
C o
n tr
o ls
87
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamps light up: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.
xDrive xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driv- ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axle depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions.
Dynamic Performance Control
The concept Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the handling characteristics of your BMW when starting off, cornering, and during evasive maneuvers. To achieve this, the system variably distributes the drive torque of the rear axle to the two rear wheels. This further increases the steering precision and tracking stability of your vehicle.
Display The instrument panel display shows how xDrive and Dynamic Performance Control are distrib- uting the drive torque.
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever repeatedly until the display appears, refer to arrow.
The drive train and wheels are schematically depicted. Bar graphs show the current distribution of drive torque. The longer an illuminated bar is, the greater the drive torque in the related wheel.
Malfunction If xDrive and Dynamic Performance Control are malfunctioning, the instrument panel display appears in gray.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to maintain even better control of your BMW under these conditions. The vehicle moves at approximately walking speed without active intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving down steep hills with a speed below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed automatically down to approximately walking speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h, and then main- tains this speed at a constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
Increasing or reducing speed You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary this automatically controlled speed within a range extending from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
88
15 mph/25 km/h. You can specify a target speed within the same range by using the lever of the cruise control.
With downhill grade over 10 you can reduce the speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the lever of the cruise control beyond the resis- tance point, arrow 3.
1 Increasing speed
2 Pull to the resistance point: Reduce speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h
3 Pull beyond the resistance point: With downhill grade over 10, reduce speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up. The HDC display is shown in the instrument panel.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied automatically.
Deactivating HDC Press the button again. The LED and the HDC display go out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Displays* in instrument panel
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following situations due to a high brake temperature:
> The LED in the button and the display HDC go out during HDC operation.
> The LED in the button and the HDC display do not light up when the button is pressed.
Malfunction of driving stability control systems
When driving on poor roads, avoid using full throttle or pressing the accelerator
beyond the kick-down point and also avoid heavy braking. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged or accidents can occur.<
Adaptive Drive*
The concept Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which occurs when cornering quickly or during fast evasive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive reduces the steering angle requirement, improves the running comfort and increases the dynamic driving characteristics of your BMW.
C o
n tr
o ls
89
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Chassis and suspension tuning You can choose between two types of chassis and suspension tuning.
> Normal: The comfortable basic setting offers opti- mum comfort when traveling.
> Sport: The sporty basic setting offers increased driving agility.
Selecting chassis and suspension tuning
Press the button. The system switches between the two chassis and suspension tuning settings.
> Sport: The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument panel.
> Normal: The LED in the button goes out.
The selection of the chassis and suspension tuning setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Starting assistant The starting assistant enables you to start off conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle may also roll back slightly during this time. After releasing the footbrake, immediately start quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and it begins to roll back.<
Self-leveling suspension*
Malfunction The warning lamp for self-leveling suspension lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Control
Display. A malfunction has occurred in the self- leveling suspension. Stop and check the vehi- cle. If it is considerably lower at the rear than at the front, and possibly also on one side rear left compared to rear right , proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground clearance and driving comfort may be notice- ably reduced. Even if the orientation of the vehi- cle is normal, when a malfunction is indicated on the display, you should proceed to the near- est BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW guide- lines and uses appropriately trained personnel.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ- ual wheels during driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change in the rolling circumference and therefore the rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The system detects this change and reports it as a flat tire.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
90
Function requirements In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-
rected and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural, even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains* When you are driving with the compact wheel* the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.
Initializing system The initialization finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys- tem when driving with snow chains* or with the compact wheel*.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The message "resetting FTM " is displayed.
9. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving.
Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.
If you have deactivated DSC, it will be activated automatically.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In case of further air loss of the defective wheel, its position will be indicated to you on the Control Display.
C o
n tr
o ls
91
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
If the vehicle is not equipped with run- flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:
> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load: 4 or more persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system reports when the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid- erably in one or several tires.
Function requirements In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth- erwise fault-free operation of the system is not ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM electronics, e.g. a compact wheel*, or if TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure changes during driving into account. A correc- tion is only required if requested by TPM with the color.
Green The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis- play.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
92
One wheel is yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.
All wheels are yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.
Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or devices which use the same radio fre- quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued automatically. Do not reset the system when driving with a compact wheel*.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla- tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur- ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the Control Display.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis- play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.
C o
n tr
o ls
93
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run- flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving. Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:
> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load: 4 or more persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. The tires are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following situations:
> In case of a malfunction: Have the system checked
> If a wheel without TPM electronics is mounted, e.g. a compact wheel*
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency
Explanation according to the NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare*, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety fea- ture, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illumi- nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signif- icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- ping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
94
function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres- sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept The active steering actively varies the steering angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer- ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies the steering force required for steering depend- ing on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low road speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer- ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes.
Malfunction The warning lamp lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Con- trol Display. The active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds,
greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel move- ments. The stability-promoting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.
Brake force display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
C o
n tr
o ls
95
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head-level airbags in front and rear
3 Side airbags in backrests
Protective action To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on page 42.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint system from the vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the wiring or the individual components in the air- bag system. This category includes the uphol- stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars along with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been trig-
gered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undes- ired airbag triggering, either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- uating the impression on the occupied seat sur- face of the front passenger seat. The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys- tem.
The current status of the front passenger airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 53. When teenagers and adults assume certain sit- ting positions, this can cause the front and side airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp for the
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
96
front passenger airbags lights up when this occurs. In these cases, change the sitting posi- tion so that the front passenger airbags are acti- vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be produced by changing the sitting position, transport the correspond- ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov- ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items onto the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not lay objects under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor- rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags indicates the operating status of the front and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on the seat occupation. The indica- tor lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a child restraint system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat. The front and side airbags on the front pas- senger side are not activated.
Most child's seats are detected by the system. Especially the child's seats
required by the NHTSA at the time the vehi- cle is manufactured. After installing a child's seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up.
This indicates that the child's seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient height is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags on the front pas- senger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty. However, the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag sys- tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi- ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not respond in the expected manner in an accident despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
C o
n tr
o ls
97
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Head-Up Display*
The concept With the Head-Up Display important informa- tion is projected into the driver's field of view, e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to take in this information without looking away from the road.
Switching on/off Press the button.
1 Navigation information or Check Control messages
2 Cruise control
3 Speed
Selecting displays iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.
7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis- play.
8. Press the controller. The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Adjusting brightness and height of display The brightness of the display is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the base setting. With the low beams switched on, the brightness can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of the instrument lighting.
T ec
hn o
lo g
y fo
r c o
m fo
rt , c
o n
ve n
ie n
ce a
nd s
af et
y
98
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Brightness / Posi- tion" is selected and press the controller.
7. If necessary, move the controller to the left or right to select "Brightness" or "Display position".
8. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Notes The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis- play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting conditions
If the image is distorted, have the basic setting checked at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Cen- ter.
Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield complies with the require- ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre- cise display. A film in the windshield prevents the double images from being displayed. Windshield replacement should be carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel.
Care instructions You can find everything you need to know on this topic by consulting the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may result.<
C o
n tr
o ls
99
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low beams and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run- ning lamps, welcome lamps, and Adaptive Head Light*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati- cally switched off when the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.
If necessary, switch on the parking lamps, switch position 1.
Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos- sible to start the engine. It is better to switch on the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to page 101.<
Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control* In switch position 3, the system activates the low beams and switches them on or off in response to changes in ambient light condi- tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol lights up when the low beams are on. You can activate the daytime running lamps, refer to page 100. In the situations named above, the system then automatically switches over to the low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, if you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when the vehi- cle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating welcome lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
L am
p s
100
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Pathway lighting When you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps, the low beams will come on for a brief period. You can set the duration or deactivate the func- tion via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Daytime running lamps The daytime running lamps light up in posi- tion 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1, the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.
Daytime running lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
C o
n tr
o ls
101
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g. serpentines, or when turn- ing, one of the two front fog lamps is also switched on up to a speed of approx. 45 mph/ 70 km/h. This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 99.
The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front pas- senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are active.
High beams/ roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right* You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one side of your vehicle when parking.
Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point for approx. 1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps*
First, switch on the parking lamps or the low beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru- ment panel lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
L am
p s
102
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using the knurled wheel.
Interior lamps The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, door entry lighting*, cargo bay lamps, and the courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located in the door handles to illuminate the exterior area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 56.<
Switching interior lamps on and off manually
Press the button.
If you wish the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lighting and courtesy lamps to remain switched off all the time, press the but- ton for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are provided in the front and rear* adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button to switch the lamps on and off.
C o
n tr
o ls
103
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Climate
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air for the upper body region, refer to Front ventilation on page 107
3 Air to footwell
4 Automatic climate control
C lim
at e
104
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heatingand ventilation, driver's side 48
2 Temperature, left side of passenger com- partment
3 AUTO program
4 Temperature, right side of passenger com- partment
5 Maximum cooling
6 Seat heatingand ventilation, front passen- ger side 48
7 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
8 Switching cooling function on and off man- ually
9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode
10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic climate control, residual heat
11 Rear window defroster
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation
13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Manual air distribution, driver's side
The current setting for manual air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.
A congenial climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you only need to select an interior temperature pleasant to you.
The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile settings on page 28.
AUTO program The AUTO program handles the adjustment of air volume and air distribution to the windshield and side windows, in the direction of the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera- ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. At the same time, a con- densation sensor controls the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro- gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button. The respective current setting is displayed when the button on the display of the automatic climate control is pressed.
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
C o
n tr
o ls
105
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto- matic program is switched on.
Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the driver's and front passenger side.
The automatic climate control adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi- mum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.
In the highest setting you activate the maximum heating capacity, regardless of the outside tem- perature. And in the lowest setting, the maxi- mum cooling capacity.
When switching between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi- cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Adjusting temperature in upper body region 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if necessary. Move the controller to the right or left repeatedly until the driver's or front passenger side is selected.
5. Move the controller to select the field.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera- ture.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa- tion from the windshield and front side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a while. Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper wires are used
as an antenna and are not part of the rear win- dow defroster.
Air volume, manual You can vary the air volume by pressing on the corresponding side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.
Air distribution, manual You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle interior via various programs, separately for the driver's and passenger's side.
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
C lim
at e
106
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
> Individual program
Selecting program Press the button repeatedly until the desired program is shown on
the Control Display.
Adjusting air distribution individually individual program The settings are stored in this program.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller. The driver's and front passenger side can be adjusted separately with the fields on the right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if necessary. Move the controller to the right or left repeatedly until the driver's or front passen- ger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the con- troller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu- tion.
Driver's side:
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4 Air for the upper body
5 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual air distribution settings.<
The automatic mode for the air volume remains effective with manual air distribution.
Switching cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting. This function is only available when the engine is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensa- tion on the window surfaces or to quickly remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati- cally with the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling Maximally cooled air is obtained as quickly as possible at an outside temperature above approx. 327/ 06 and with the engine running.
The automatic climate control switches into the recirculated-air mode at the lowest tempera- ture. The maximum air volume flows out of the air vents for the upper body. Therefore, open these vents for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or unpleasant odors in the immediate environment by suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and con- trols the shut-off automatically.
C o
n tr
o ls
107
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left LED on, AUC mode: the system detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off the supply as needed.
> Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu- lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. The recirculated-air mode should not be used without interruption over an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteri- orates continuously.<
Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.
Switching on Pressing the right side switches on the residual heat utilization when the following conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the engine
> with the engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
> at an outside temperature below 777/ 256
REST appears on the display of the automatic climate control when the residual heat utiliza- tion is switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature, the air volume and the air distribution can be set.
Switching off You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches off the residual heat utilization. REST disappears from the display of the auto- matic climate control.
Switching automatic climate control on and off
You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.
You switch on the system again by pressing any button of the automatic climate control.
Front ventilation
1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents
2 Lever to change the air vent direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the air vents, otherwise these could be cata-
pulted outwards and lead to injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling Adjust the air vents to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance, if the interior has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation Set the air vents so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you.
C lim
at e
108
Ventilation in rear
1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents
2 Knurled wheel for adjusting the tempera- ture in the upper body region:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Lever to change the air vent direction
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gas- eous pollutants from the outside air. This com- bined filter is changed during maintenance by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. You can select a display of more detailed infor- mation on the Control Display, refer to page 72.
Rear automatic climate control* The control unit of the rear automatic climate control is located in the center console in the rear.
1 Temperature, left rear seating area
2 AUTO program
3 Display
4 Temperature, right rear seating area
5 Seat heating, right rear seat
6 Air volume, manual
7 Seat heating, left rear seat
The current setting for the temperature and the air volume is shown on display 3.
Activating rear automatic climate control iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Rear climate control" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired settings and press the controller.
The rear automatic climate control is activated and the settings of the automatic climate control on the driver's side can be applied if necessary.
C o
n tr
o ls
109
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The rear automatic climate control is not ready for operation if the automatic cli-
mate control is switched off. When activating the function of the automatic climate control for defrosting the windows and removing conden- sation, the rear automatic climate control is also not ready for operation.<
AUTO program The AUTO program assumes the adjustment of the air distribution toward the upper body and in the footwell, as well as the air volume for you. It also adapts your instruc-
tions for the temperature to outside influences throughout the year.
Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the left and right side.
The rear automatic climate control adjusts this temperature as quickly
as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.
When switching between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the
rear automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Air volume, manual You can vary the air volume by pressing on the corresponding side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.
Switching off rear automatic climate control
You can select the lowest blower speed by pressing and holding the left side. Pressing again switches
off the rear automatic climate control.
The rear automatic climate control can also be switched off with iDrive. To switch
on the rear automatic climate control again, the system must first be reactivated, refer to Acti- vating rear automatic climate control.<
You switch on the system again by pressing any button of the rear automatic climate control.
Ventilation in rear
1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close air vents
2 Knurled wheels to adjust temperature in upper body region; can be adjusted sepa- rately for left and right:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Lever to change the air vent direction
Parked car ventilation*
The concept The parked car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem- peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system to start. The parked car ventilation can also be switched on and off directly. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, you should refrain from acti- vating it twice in succession without allowing the battery to be recharged in normal operation between use.
C lim
at e
110
The air emerges through the upper body region air vents in the instrument panel. Therefore, please open the air vents.
The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con- troller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is highlighted.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating activation time Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.
The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control lights up.
C o
n tr
o ls
111
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes when the parked car ventilation has switched on.
The parked car ventilation is only avail- able for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
112
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote control*
The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled accessories, such as garage and gate or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control regis- ters and stores signals from the original hand- held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched on, this programmed memory button 1 can be used to operate the respective feature. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 113.
To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Also, comply with the safety precautions of the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility If you see this symbol on the packaging or in the manual supplied with the orig- inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated universal remote control.
Should you have additional questions, please contact your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or call: 1-800-355-3515. Information is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 56.
2. When starting operation for the first time: Press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/ 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys- tem of the original hand-held transmitter used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the inte- grated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
C o
n tr
o ls
113
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device cannot be used after repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short time and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates that the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. In the case of an alternating-code system, program the mem- ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the equipment to be set. You will find informa- tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza- tion. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
Should you have questions, please con- tact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly: All stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs 1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/ 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys- tem of the original hand-held transmitter used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
3. When the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
114
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display indicates the cardinal or intercardi- nal direction in which you are currently driving.
Operating principle You can run various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object, e.g. a ball-point pen etc. The following setting options are displayed consecutively, depending on how long the adjustment button is pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left/right-hand drive vehicle
> 12 to 15 seconds: setting language
Setting compass zones
Set the respectively applicable compass zone in your vehicle so that the compass functions properly, refer to the map of the world with compass zones.
To set the compass zones, press the adjust- ment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The dis- play indicates the number of the currently set compass zone.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjusting button repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that applies to your current position is displayed.
The compass will be operational again after approx. 10 seconds.
C o
n tr
o ls
115
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Calibrating digital compass Calibrate the digital compass In the following situations:
> The wrong cardinal direction appears on the display.
> The cardinal direction displayed does not change despite a change in the direction of travel.
> Not all cardinal directions are displayed.
Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal
objects or overhead power lines in the vicin- ity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
2. Input the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to display C. Then drive in a complete circle at least once at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. If the calibration is successful, display C is replaced with the points of the compass.
Setting right/left-hand drive vehicle Your digital compass is already set to right or left-hand drive vehicle to match your vehicle at the factory.
Setting language You can set the language of the display.
Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to change between English "E" and German "O".
The setting is automatically stored after approx. 10 seconds.
Roller sun blinds for rear side windows* Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto bracket.
Do not open the window with the roller blind raised, as otherwise there is a dan-
ger of damage, and therefore a danger of inju- ries at higher speeds.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The covers open upward and downward and the lighting in the glove com- partment switches on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after use.<
Closing Press one of the two covers closed.
Opening manually In the event of a power failure or electrical mal- function, you can open the glove compartment manually.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
116
1. Position the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 245, on the instrument panel at the side and open the cover, arrow.
2. Pull the strap upward, arrow. The glove compartment is opened manually.
Center armrest, front A storage compartment is located under the armrest between the front seats and, depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for the mobile phone bracket or the snap-in adapter. Also refer to page 206.
Opening cover
Push cover down slightly and press the button. The cover folds upward.
Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In connection, refer to page 186
> USB audio interface*, refer to page 187
Flashlight* The flashlight is located in the storage compart- ment between the front seats. Pull the flashlight out of the holder when needed.
Battery change To remove and insert the batteries, screw off the flashlight head.
Return used batteries to a recycling col- lection point or to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Storage compartments Compartments are located in the doors, in the center console in the front and rear*, and in the rear console. Storage nets* are located on the backrests of the front seats.
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects in the storage nets; otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent.<
Clothes hooks
To fold out, press against upper edge.
When hanging clothing on the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
C o
n tr
o ls
117
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to occupants during braking or evasive maneu- vers.<
Cup holders Use lightweight, unbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages; oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable containers into the cup holders, as otherwise damage can result.<
Front
Slide the cover back.
Rear
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the beverage container before folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag; otherwise it may cause dam- age.<
Ashtray
Front
To open the cover, slide it forward.
Press the button. The ashtray insert raises slightly and can be removed.
Rear
Slide the cover back.
Remove the insert to empty.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
118
Lighter
Front
Press in the lighter with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power outlets in the vehicle.
In cargo bay
Access to socket: Fold open the cover.
In the rear center console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack- age, the socket in the rear is covered with a cap or equipped with a lighter. Refer to Cigarette lighter, front, page 118.
Access to socket: Remove cap or lighter.
In storage compartment under center armrest
Access to socket*: Pull off the cover.
C o
n tr
o ls
119
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
In the rear console
Slide the cover back.
Access to socket: Pull off the cover.
Rear center armrest
Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm- rest.
Cargo bay
Cargo bay cover
Deploy cargo bay cover by pulling back.
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the cargo bay cover. If you do so, they may
pose a danger to vehicle occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Removing
1. Grasp retracted cargo bay cover under- neath the upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment package, you can store the cover under the floor panel in the cargo bay.
Installing When installing, proceed in the opposite order of removal.
1. Set the cargo bay cover into place on the left and right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide forward until it snaps into the two side brackets.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
120
Expanding cargo bay The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold down both sides separately in order to expand the cargo bay.
Before folding the rear seat backrest for- ward or using the ski bag, remove bever-
age containers from the cup holder and close the cup holder.<
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva- sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu- pants.<
To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the safety belt information on page 42.<
Storage compartments in cargo bay Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- lowing storage compartments are provided in the cargo bay.
> Storage compartment* behind the left side panel.
> Storage compartments under the floor panel.
> Storage compartment on the right in the cargo bay.
> Storage tray* under the floor panel, capacity approx. 2.8 cu ft/80 liters.
> Retaining straps* on the left and right side panel for securing small objects.
> Hooks*, e.g. for hanging up shopping bags or carrier bags on the left and right in the cargo bay.
> Net* on the left side panel of the cargo bay for smaller objects.
> Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can secure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash- ing eyes. They can be removed at the notches in the rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the button.
Read and comply with the information enclosed with the heavy-duty cargo
straps.<
Floor panel flap
To access the onboard toolkit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer to arrow.
The floor panel flap can be locked.
Adaptive fastening system* The adaptive fastening system is used to divide up the cargo bay. It consists of two brackets with a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are guided into the two rails on the cargo bay floor.
Before using the adaptive fastening sys- tem, fold up and lock the rear seat back-
rest; otherwise, the cargo could be thrown into the vehicle interior in an accident.<
C o
n tr
o ls
121
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1 Brackets
2 Telescopic rail
3 Notch in the cargo bay rail
Mounting brackets The two brackets are connected with a tele- scopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch in the rail on the cargo bay floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets. They must be clearly heard to engage.
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth- erwise they could be unlocked.<
Dividing up cargo bay
You can position the cargo as follows:
> between the rear seat backrest and the telescopic rail
> between the telescopic rail and the retain- ing strap
Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and retaining strap:
1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining strap around the cargo, arrow 2.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3 on the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1. The retaining strap is tensioned.
You can also hook both retaining straps into each other.<
When you are finished using the adaptive fas- tening system, unhook the retaining strap and guide it back into the bracket in order to prevent damage and injury. Then slide the fastening system toward the front in order to permit the best possible use of the cargo bay.
Removing brackets Press down the brackets, slide them up to the notches of the rails and remove them.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack- age, you can store the adaptive fastening sys- tem under the floor panel in the cargo bay.
Ski bag* The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow- boards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/ 2.10 m in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to contract, reducing its overall capacity.
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis- play screen of the DVD system in the
rear*, as otherwise the display screen could be damaged.<
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
122
Loading 1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the cargo bay opens. If you press the button firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the rear seat backrest.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to do so, it could endanger occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in reverse order.
Removing ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to put it to other uses.
1. Pull the handle toward the front, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Details on various inserts are available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
C o
n tr
o ls
123
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Driving tips This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
126
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin- ues to provide optimized economy of operation throughout an extended service life, we request that you devote careful attention to the follow- ing section.
Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at changing engine and vehicle speeds, however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode during these initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.
Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during this break-in period.
Following part replacement Observe the break-in instructions again if com- ponents mentioned above must be replaced after subsequent driving operation.
Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors. Through a few simple steps, your driving style, and regular maintenance, you can have a positive influence on your fuel con- sumption and environmental impact.
Removing unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove add-on parts after use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close windows and glass sunroof An open glass sunroof or open window likewise increases the drag coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.
Check tire inflation pressures regularly Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as needed at least twice a month and before long trips.
An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases the rolling resistance and thus increases the fuel consumption and tire wear.
Driving off immediately Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Thinking ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To do so, maintain the appropriate distance from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory and smooth driving style reduces fuel con- sumption.
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
127
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Avoiding high engine speeds Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con- sumption and minimizes wear.
Taking advantage of coasting The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.
Switching off engine during longer stops Switch off the engine at longer stops such as traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic jams. Even having the engine switched off for approx. 4 seconds results in fuel savings.
Switch off functions currently not required Functions such as air conditioning, seat heat- ing, or rear window defrosting consume a lot of energy and require additional fuel. Their influ- ence is particularly pronounced in city traffic and stop & go operation. For this reason, it is a good idea to switch these functions off when they are not really needed.
Having maintenance carried out Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to achieve the optimum economy and service life of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the maintenance performed by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Also please pay atten- tion to the BMW maintenance system, refer to page 243.
General driving notes
Closing liftgate Operate the vehicle only when the liftgate is completely closed. Otherwise, exhaust
fumes could enter into the passenger compart- ment.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lift- gate open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic climate control to a high level, refer to page 105.
Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles, extremely high temper- atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious property damage as well as personal injury. Do not touch hot tailpipes, as otherwise there is a danger of burns.<
Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing, and is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini- mum tread depth on page 236.
Driving through water Do not drive through water on the road if it is deeper than 18 in/45 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<
Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. In situations that require it, it is best to brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
128
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.
Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further increased by downshifting in the manual mode of the automatic transmission, if necessary into first gear, refer to page 62. This prevents an excessive strain on the brakes.
Do not drive in idle or with the engine stopped, otherwise there will be no
engine braking action or support of the braking force and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of movement of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.
When vehicle is parked Condensation forms in the automatic climate control system during operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 50, otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.
Release the parking brake, particularly when you have activated Automatic Hold, refer to page 58.
General information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
Mixed tires* Before driving into a car wash, make sure that the vehicle width is not too large for
the car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the car wash could be damaged.<
With comfort access* Insert the remote control into the ignition lock. The engine can be switched off in transmission position N, also refer to page 38.
Loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
129
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-
aged.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg. Otherwise, this could damage the vehicle and produce unstable vehicle operating conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, then the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low as possible, placing it directly behind the backrest.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> When hauling very heavy cargo and the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.
> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge of the backrest.
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
130
> Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects which could strike the rear window while driving.
Securing cargo > Use the luggage net*, retaining straps*, or
securing straps to hold down small and lightweight luggage and cargo.
> For larger and heavier pieces, heavy-duty cargo straps* are available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Four lashing eyes* mounted in the cargo bay are used to secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer to illustration.
> Please observe the special instructions supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary. Use only the lashing eyes*, refer to illustration, to secure the heavy-duty cargo straps; other- wise, the cargo straps could come loose or the vehicle could be damaged. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 260, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. You should never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak- ing or evasive maneuvers.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack* A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Please comply with the precau- tions included with the installation instructions.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on its handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under Weights on page 260.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed and must not extend outward beyond the limits of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest pieces on the bottom. Be sure to maintain ade- quate clearance for the raising of the glass sun- roof and that objects do not project into the opening path of the liftgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Driving on poor roads Your BMW is at home on all roads and surfaces. It combines a 4-wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other- wise the vehicle may be damaged.<
When you are driving on poor roads, there are a few points which you should strictly observe for your own safety, for that of your passengers, and for the safety of the vehicle:
> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving off and avoid taking risks at all costs.
> Adapt your driving speed to the road condi- tions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
131
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> If you want to drive on very steep uphill or downhill gradients, make sure beforehand that the engine oil and coolant levels are near the MAX mark, refer to page 240.
> On very steep downhill slopes, use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 87.
> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these obstacles whenever possible.
> Please make sure that the undercarriage does not touch the ground, for example on crests and bumpy roads. The ground clear- ance of the vehicle is a maximum of approx. 8 in/20 cm. Please note that the ground clearance can vary depending on loading and the driving conditions of the vehicle.
> Only drive through water on roads up to a maximum depth of 18 in/45 cm and only at walking speed, making sure not to stop in the process.
> After driving through water at low speed, lightly press the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking effect from being reduced by wetness.
> Depending on the condition of the surface, it may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on page 86.
> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the driving stability control systems can distrib- ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
Please note the following points after driving on poor roads to maintain the driving safety of your BMW:
> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
> Clean mud, snow, ice etc. from the wheels and tires and check the tires for damage.
Navigation This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
S ta
rt in
g n
av ig
at io
n sy
st em
134
Starting navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.
Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi- gation DVD. The latest version is available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVD.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up. The navigation DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Allow several seconds for the system to scan the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD 1. Press the button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos- sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is also shown on the Control Display.
Display in assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica- tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current position".
4. Press the controller.
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
135
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Displaying arrow view in map view If the navigation system suggests a change of direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions" and press the controller.
The arrow view appears in the assistance window.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
136
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to page 139
> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 142
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 143
> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 144
> Selecting home address, refer to page 146
After selecting your destination you can pro- ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 148.
You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. If you do not observe this precau- tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Opening navigation system iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
The Control Display shows:
> the arrow view or map view during destina- tion guidance
> the destination list when destination guid- ance is switched off
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
137
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Entering a destination manually The system's word matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns/cities, refer to page 147. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller. "New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.
The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/ city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.
Selecting country 1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guid- ance, at least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered.
Entering destination via town/city name 1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con- troller. A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
> Delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller longer.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
138
4. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.
> Enter blank space if necessary: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
5. Change to the third field from the top if nec- essary. Turn the controller until the town/ city name is selected from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination via zip code 1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.
> Enter a blank space: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
> Delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller longer.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street. The street is entered exactly like the desti- nation.
The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.
Entering a street without entering a town/city of destination You can also enter a street without entering a town/city of destination. In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
139
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The related town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can undo this entry. This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered des- tination, because, for example, it belongs to another part of the town/city.
1. Change to upper field. The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the request for the entry of a street in the coun- try appears and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top and enter the street.
Entering house number All house numbers stored for the street on the navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the con- troller.
2. Enter the house number: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.
3. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller. Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If the destination guidance does not need to be started immediately: Select "Add to destination list" and press the controller. The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 143.
Entering destination via voice* You can enter a desired destination with the voice command system. When entering the destination, it is possible to change between voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti- vate the voice command system for this pur- pose if necessary.
With {Options} you can have the possible commands read aloud.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Enter address}
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
140
Selecting country 1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the country of destination in the language of the voice command system.
Entering destination The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.
Spelling destination To enter the destination, spell it using the orthography of the country of destination. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina- tions that match your entries. Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the Con- trol Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire word* Towns/cities and streets located in the region where the language of the voice command sys- tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a destination located in the US as an entire word, the language of the sys- tem must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to request the destina- tion.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina- tions that match your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Destinations that sound the same which cannot be differentiated by the system
are summarized in a separate list and shown as
2. Say the name of the country of destina- tion.
1. Spell town/city name: Say at least the first three letters of the destination. The more letters you say, the more exactly the system recognizes the town/city.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Select city/town:
> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
> Select other city/town: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Display additional entries of the list: {Next page}
> Spell the city/town again: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination.
A destination is suggested by the system.
3. Select city/town:
> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
> Select other city/town: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Enter city/town again: {Repeat}
> Enter destination by spelling it: {Spell}
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
141
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
a destination followed by three dots. Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then select the desired city/town in this list.<
Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination.
To enter the house number:
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered. Say the house number as individual numbers.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Saving destination The destination is added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.
Selecting destination via map If you only know the location of the town/city or street of the destination, then you can enter the destination by using a map. You can use the cursor to select the destination on the map and then apply it in the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Con- trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti- vated, around the last destination entered
4. Select destination with cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the corresponding direction. The controller can be moved to the left, right, forward and back.
5. To apply or store the destination in the des- tination guidance, press the controller. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.
> "Show current position" places the cur- rent position in the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the current destination in the center of the map.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or {Add to address book}
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
142
> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for the destination entry can also be displayed in the map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using information You can obtain a display of selected destina- tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and apply them in the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control- ler.
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res- taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the maximum distance from the current loca- tion.
7. Select "
8. Select a destination and press the control- ler.
The scope of the information and symbols is dependent on the respec-
tive navigation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To apply the address in the destination list and start the destination guidance: Select the symbol and press the controller.
> To establish a telephone connection: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
> To display additional destinations: Select the symbol and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
143
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> To start a new search: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in map view If, for example, you have selected the category Hotels and have started the search, the hotels are shown on the map as symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con- troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To display the symbols: Select "Show map icons" and press the con- troller.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list The last 20 entered destinations are shown in the destination list. You can display these desti- nations and apply them in the destination guid- ance. For example, to plan a longer route, you can store all destinations you want to drive to in advance in the destination list, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 137.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The last destination entered is the first item in the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destina- tion during destination guide.
To display additional destinations from the des- tination list: turn the controller.
Applying destination in destination guidance 1. Select the desired destination and press
the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
Editing destination list 1. Select the desired destination in the desti-
nation list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Store entry: Select "Add to address book".
> Display information on destination: Select "Information on destination".
> Delete entry: Select "Delete entry".
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
144
> Delete all entries: Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.
> Change entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination via town/city name, page 137.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con- troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.
4. Enter name and address, also refer to Entering a destination manually, page 137.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller. The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti- nation list into the address book, refer to page 143.
Storing current position* The current position can be applied in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper- ation, refer to Entering a destination manu- ally, page 137.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
You can also apply your current position in the address book if you have left the sector covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller. The stored entries appear on the Control Display.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
145
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start the destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler.
Changing destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller.
4. Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destina- tion manually, page 137.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con- troller.
Deleting all destinations from address book 1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Delete data" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
146
Home address You can store your current position or the cur- rent destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.
Storing home address 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or "Save current destination" during the desti- nation guidance, and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
Applying home address as destination 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
Changing home address 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 137.
Selecting route You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like while entering the destination and whenever the des- tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules. The road type is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.
Changing route criteria 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are listed on the Control Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways" Freeways and major traffic arteries are given priority
> "Avoid highways" Freeways are avoided where possible
> "Fast route" The short traveling time, being a combi- nation of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads
> "Short route" Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
147
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is highlighted.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri- terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route" Automatic changing of the route in case of traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads" Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display.
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con- troller.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, the calculation time for the route can increase considerably.<
Word matching principle The system supports the word matching princi- ple to make it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns/cities. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another coun- try.
Example:
Instead of "Mnchen", you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/ cities and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough let- ters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.
> The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD. The system will not accept non existent names and addresses.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
148
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new des- tination, refer to page 136.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis- play on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment via iDrive at any time. You will be punctually notified of a change of direction
by spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrow.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons Press the ... button on which the desired destination is stored, also refer to page 22.
Ending/continuing destination guidance
In arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In destination list This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the controller.
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con- troller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
149
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
When you park the vehicle before reaching the entered destination, the following question is displayed before beginning the next trip: "Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.
To start the destination guidance: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying route You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items on page 18.<
Displaying arrow display 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/ending destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current position
7 Direction of travel
> Outline arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route
> Solid arrow: Arrow shows the route to be calculated from a bird's eye view when the vehicle is not located in an area contained on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel park- ing lot.
Depending on the equipment, the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destina- tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.
Before a change in direction, the representation of the arrow changes.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance up to change of direction
3 Change of direction
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
150
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/ending destination guidance
3 Selecting destination via map
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa- tion last selected can be displayed/hidden, refer to Selecting destination using infor- mation, page 142
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Manually displaying traffic information* 8 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
The estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination are shown in the bottom line of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north, toward your current direction of travel, or show the map in perspective. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller. The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale Turn the controller to change the scale.
Displaying roads and towns/cities of route You can have the roads and towns/cities along the route displayed during destination guid- ance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each individual route are also displayed.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
151
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the controller.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance via voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on and off at any time:
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Repeating and canceling voice instructions With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel you can also make the following settings, refer to page 51:
> Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off: Hold the button down.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
152
Setting volume of voice instructions The volume can only be adjusted while a voice instruction is being output.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Changing route During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information* In many congested areas, you can receive traf- fic information transmitted by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic management centers and the traffic information is periodically updated. During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation relevant to your planned route is auto- matically displayed and, if you wish, taken into account in the route planning. Whether destina- tion guidance is active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic information on/off iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
153
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.
The traffic information can be received and displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the strongest reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta- tion name, frequency, local call letters, or
other information is displayed.<
Manually displaying traffic information
During destination guidance During destination guidance, traffic information can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf- fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation on the planned route is marked with a yellow diamond.
First the traffic information along the planned route is shown sorted according to the distance to the current vehicle position.
With destination guidance switched off 1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.
First the traffic information along the planned route is shown sorted according to the distance to the current vehicle position.
Depiction of traffic information in map view The traffic information symbols are shown in the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The section of the route affected by a traffic report as well as the indication for the type of incident, which will be described below, are dis- played and hidden. This occurs as a function of the scale selected.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
154
Displaying detailed traffic information Select traffic information from the displayed list and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols for traffic information
Traffic event with map scales greater than 5 miles/10 km, arrow points in the direction of travel concerned
Several traffic events have been received. Select a smaller scale to display these individually.
Traffic light failure
Roadwork
General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriage way
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop-and-go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of travel
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
155
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Traffic information during destination guidance If there are traffic obstructions on the planned route, the traffic information symbols are dis- played with a red border.
System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, refer to page 146.
Displaying traffic obstructions If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga- tion system and "Dynamic route" is not selected, then you will be provided with certain information from a distance of approx. 25 miles/ 40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic jam. The last possible junction will be displayed shortly before this.
Select "Detour" and press the controller. The navigation system determines a new route to bypass the traffic congestion.
This information is displayed even if you have activated a different function on the Control Display.
Dynamic route planning When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route may nevertheless lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Current position" is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.
To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis- played on a map, refer to page 150.
W h
at to
d o
if
156
What to do if
What to do if
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc- tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con- trol Display? The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This infor- mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- play? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your position is not yet avail- able on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your posi- tion. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> the destination guidance does not accept a destination? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name? On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guid- ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des- tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let- ters to choose from. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.
> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec- tions? You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga- tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
157
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Entertainment Operation of the radio and CD as well as their
tone settings are described in this chapter.
O n
/O ff
a n
d s
et ti
n g
s
160
On/Off and settings
The following audio sources share the same controls and adjustment options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer*
Controls The audio sources can be controlled using:
> Buttons in the area of the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttonson steering wheel, refer to page 11
> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21
Buttons on CD player
Equipment with a single drive
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off. When the system is switched on, the most recently selected radio station or CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Eject CD.
3 Drive for audio CDs
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD changer.
Equipment with two drives
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off. When the system is switched on, the most recently selected radio station or CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVDs
Operation via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
161
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio* > "CD": CD player or changer* > "AUX": AUX-In connection, USB audio
interface* > "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sam- ple stations.
From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items on page 18.<
From radio readiness, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off To switch the Entertainment sound output on and off: Press knob 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi- cates that sound output is switched off.
For equipment with a single drive, the sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition switched off. Switch on the sound output again for this pur- pose.
Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
From radio readiness, the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass, or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once.
From radio readiness, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Changing tone settings 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" or "Tone / Volume" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected when you have opened "Entertainment" in the start menu: Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the controller.
Treble and bass 1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
O n
/O ff
a n
d s
et ti
n g
s
162
2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Balance and fader You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control The speed-dependent volume control auto- matically increases the volume with increasing speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.
When equipped with two drives:
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- troller.
2. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
When equipped with a single drive:
1. Select "Volume settings" and press the controller.
2. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
163
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Professional HiFi System* You can choose between stereo and multichan- nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
3. Press the controller. The spatial sound effect is activated.
Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Reset" is selected and press the controller.
6. When equipped with two drives: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
R ad
io
164
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.
Listening to radio
Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre- sets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or if the stations displayed can no longer be received in the AM reception range, update the stations with the best reception, refer to page 165.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system changes to the next displayed sta- tion. You can also change stations with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection criteria:
> "All stations"*: Stations that can currently be received in the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest received signals in the "AM" waveband. With High Definition Radio: the stations with the strongest received signals in the "FM" waveband.
> "Presets": Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 166.
> "Manual": To set stations that can be received in addi- tion to those displayed, refer to Manually selecting frequency on page 165.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
165
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
To change the selection criterion:
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Select the selection criterion and press the controller.
Sampling stations, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the stations on the current wave- band.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the radio remains on the current station.
Buttons on CD player To sample the stations, press and hold the
button for the corresponding direction.
To end scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually With "Manual" you can select stations that can be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre- quency.
Updating stations with best reception If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range of the stations originally set, you can update the list of stations in the AM range with the best reception.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
R ad
io
166
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selec- tion criterion is selected and press the con- troller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected.
7. Press the controller. The station is stored.
The stations of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.
From radio readiness, the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can also store a station on the programma- ble memory/direct selection buttons, also refer to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. Press and hold the desired button ... .
Changing a memory position 1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
167
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected. The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station.
6. Press the controller. The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System In the FM frequency range, additional informa- tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con- ditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off* 1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
High Definition Radio* Many stations transmit both analog and digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally and with improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available in order to receive digital stations.
Activating/deactivating digital radio reception iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is activated.
This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.
R ad
io
168
With some stations the digital signals are not transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig- nals. If you are in an area in which the selected station is not continuously received digitally, playback changes between analog and digital reception. This can result in repetitions or inter- ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to deactivate digital radio reception.
Selecting programs of a digital station* Some stations transmit several programs on one frequency. To select one of these pro- grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that is received digitally. This symbol is displayed when a station
is being received digitally.
4. Switch to the next program of the digital station with the buttons on the radio or the steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 166.
Updating stations offering digital reception If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range of the stations originally set, you can update the list of stations with the best reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con- troller.
The display of the stations offering digital reception is updated. This can take up to 2 min- utes.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
169
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Displaying additional information With the digital stations, additional information on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the station is changed, the additional information will be displayed again following a brief interrup- tion.
Weather news flashes* Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce- anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) of the US Department of Trade. Weather news flashes are repeated every four to six minutes and are routinely updated at intervals of one to three hours, and more often when necessary. Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a storm, the National Weather Service inter- rupts the routine weather news and transmits special warning messages instead. If you have a question about NOAA Weather Radio, please contact the nearest office of the National
Weather Service. Details are also provided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes 1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be unavailable in some regions.
S at
el lit
e ra
d io
170
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.
This new technology may experience drops in signal, causing interruptions in
playback.<
Enabling or disabling channels iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.
Enabling 1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channels: Dial the phone number.
Disabling 1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis- played.
The electronic serial number is required for disabling.<
3. To disable the channels: Dial the phone number.
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
171
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Selecting and storing channel 1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels or categories appear in the Con- trol Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets": Up to twelve channels you have stored previously.
> "All channels": All channels are displayed.
> "Categories": All channels, sorted by categories, e.g. news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym- bol.
6. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information The name of the channel and additional infor- mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
S at
el lit
e ra
d io
172
Storing channel 1. Select desired channel.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca- tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.
Changing channel with buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system switches to the next enabled chan- nel.
Notes If no signal can be received for more than four seconds, a message is displayed on the Control Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this. The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings, near trees, mountains or other sources of radio interference. Reception usually returns once the signal becomes available again.<
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
173
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
When equipped with two drives: The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Compressed audio files CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting CD player
Inserting CD Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. The CD is automatically pulled in. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the data depending on the directory structure.
Via iDrive Starting playback when there is already a CD in the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "CD" and press the controller.
4. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. On vehicles with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is switched on.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store the function CD player on the programmable memory/direct selection but- tons to start the CD player, refer to page 21.
Starting CD changer Filling CD changer, refer to page 177.
Via iDrive 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
*
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
174
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "CD" and press the controller.
4. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Select the desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be selected.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track. The track is displayed on the Control Display. You can also change tracks using the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files 1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
For equipment with two drives, you can store a certain track on the programmable memory/ direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.
Displaying information on track With compressed audio files, you can display any information stored on the current track, e.g. the name of the artist.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
175
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis- played.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Sampling tracks, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select "Scan all" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling, and the player remains on the current track.
Repeating a track 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
176
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
Random play sequence In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory in random order, select "Random direc- tory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random order, select "Random all" and press the controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction. The tracks can be listened to with some distor- tion.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
177
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
CD changer
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1 LEDs on CD bay Flash when the CD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for CD compartments LED lights up when CD compartment is filled.
Filling CD changer 1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.
2. Select another CD compartment if neces- sary: Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 1 on the CD bay flash, insert an individual CD. The CD is automatically pulled in and inserted into the selected CD compartment.
Do not push in the CD until the LEDs 1 on the CD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the CD or the CD changer may be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.<
4. To fill additional CD compartments: Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Filling empty CD compartments 1. Hold down the button.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.
2. When the LEDs 1 on the CD bay flash, insert an individual CD. The CD is automatically pulled in and inserted into the first available CD compart- ment.
Do not push in the CD until the LEDs 1 on the CD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the CD or the CD changer may be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.<
3. Wait until the CD has been pulled in.
4. To fill additional CD compartments: Repeat steps 2 and 3.
Removing CDs from CD changer 1. Press the button.
2. Press the ... button to select the CD compartment. The CD is pushed partway out of the CD changer.
3. Remove the CD.
Removing all CDs from CD changer 1. Hold down the button.
The CDs are pushed partway out of the CD changer in sequence.
2. Remove the CDs.
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
178
Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as other- wise the CD/DVD or the adapter can jam and may no longer eject properly. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<
General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes.
Filling CD/DVD changer or removing CDs/DVDs If all of the LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rapidly, then a malfunction is occurring.
To rectify the malfunction:
1. Press the button. The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
When the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/ DVD changer is once more operational.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.
Avoiding damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois- ture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro- tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.
Care If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from the center outward. For additional information on the care of CDs/DVDs, refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
179
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
DVD changer
Installation position
The BMW DVD changer for six DVDs is installed in the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1 LEDs on DVD bay Flash when the DVD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for DVD compartments The LED lights up when DVD compartment is filled.
Filling DVD changer 1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.
2. Select another DVD compartment if neces- sary: Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay flash, insert an individual DVD. The DVD is automatically pulled in and inserted into the selected DVD compart- ment.
Do not push in the DVD until the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the DVD or the DVD changer may be damaged. Do not continue to push on the DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.<
4. To fill additional DVD compartments: Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Filling empty DVD compartments 1. Hold down the button.
The LEDs on the empty DVD compart- ments flash.
2. When the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay flash, insert an individual DVD. The DVD is automatically pulled in and inserted into the first available DVD com- partment.
Do not continue to push on the DVDs; this may cause them to jam and pre-
vent them from being able to eject again.<
3. Wait until the DVD has been pulled in and the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing again.
Do not push in the DVD until the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the DVD or the DVD changer may be damaged.<
4. To fill additional DVD compartments: Repeat steps 2 and 3.
Removing DVDs from DVD changer 1. Press the button.
2. Press the ... button to select the DVD compartment. The DVD is pushed partway out of the DVD changer.
3. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not removed, it is pulled back in again after about 10 seconds.<
*
D V
D c
h an
g er
180
Removing all DVDs from DVD changer 1. Hold down the button.
The DVDs are pushed partway out of the DVD changer in sequence.
2. Remove the DVDs individually.
Malfunctions If all of the LEDs on the DVD changer flash rap- idly, then a malfunction is occurring. In this case, proceed as follows.
1. Press the button or button. The DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the DVD.
The DVD changer tests the DVD compartments and the rapid flashing of the LEDs stops. The DVD changer is once more operational.
DVD country codes Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod- ing of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The country codes supported by your DVD are con- tained in the information on your DVD. It is not possible to change this coding. An overview of the six coding zones:
DVDs with the code 0 can be played back on all units.<
Playing DVDs Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you have the option of playing back both the audio track and video track of DVDs or only their audio track.
> Vehicles with two drives: audio and video playback
> Vehicles with a single drive: audio playback, refer to page 184
Audio and video playback For your own safety, the picture only appears in the Control Display at speeds of up to about 2 mph/3 km/h. For certain national-market ver- sions, the picture does not appear in the Control Display unless the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in Park.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "DVD" and press the controller.
4. Switch into the second field if necessary, select the desired DVD and press the con- troller.
It can take a little time for the DVD contents to be scanned in. Then the DVD is played and the DVD-specific menu is displayed.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
181
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
DVD control Using the DVD control, you can select the title and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and operate functions such as language, fast for- ward and reverse, or freeze frame. A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the DVD control, under certain circumstances even while the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible to operate the DVD control under these circumstances. In this case, try to make the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
During playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "DVD control bar" if needed and press the controller.
The DVD control is displayed.
The DVD control disappears again after a short time if you have not selected a function.
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control 1. Press the controller during playback to hide
the DVD control.
2. Select the symbol and press the controller.
3. Press the controller repeatedly to increase the speed of the fast forward/reverse. The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
Select the symbol and press the controller. The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse using controller 1. Turn the controller during playback.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Turn the controller further. The speed is increased.
3. Release the controller. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The current DVD will start play at the point selected.
Skipping chapter You can change to the next or previous chapter during playback.
1. Press the controller during playback to hide the DVD control.
2. Select the symbol and press repeatedly until you reach the desired chap- ter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right repeatedly until you reach the desired chapter.
Making settings for DVD With some DVDs, it is only possible to select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu. Refer to the information on your DVD for possi- ble selections.<
Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVD
Start playback
Stop playback
Activating freeze frame
Skipping chapter
Fast forward/reverse
"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu
D V
D c
h an
g er
182
Tone control In DVDs with multichannel or surround sound, for optimum playback, select an audio track with multichannel sound and set the tone set- tings to Surround, refer to Selecting language on page 182 and Professional HiFi System* on page 163.
Adjusting brightness and contrast 1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Video settings" and press the con- troller.
4. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Resetting to defaults:
Select "Reset" and press the controller.
DVD format 1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "DVD format" and press the control- ler.
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
Selecting language 1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Language" and press the controller.
4. Select language or audio track and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
183
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
The languages and audio tracks are generally accompanied by an indication of how may channels are included. 5.1 means multichannel.
Selecting subtitling 1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Subtitles" and press the controller.
4. Select the language of the subtitles and confirm by pressing the controller.
Selecting title 1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Title" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired title.
Changing viewing angle Notes or symbols that appear during the play- back of a film generally indicate the availability of different camera angles. These are usually only briefly available.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Angle of view" and press the con- troller.
Opening DVD-specific menu Additional functions may be available on DVDs. For example, the viewer can select from several possible plots or display information on the film.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Menu" and press the controller.
3. Make your selection in the DVD-specific menu. To do so, move the controller in the corresponding direction in order to select the menu items and then press the control- ler.
4. Select "Confirm selection" and press the controller.
You can also select language, subtitles, camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu. Selection options can be found in the docu- mentation of your DVD.<
Closing settings menu > Select "Return" and press the controller.
D V
D c
h an
g er
184
Audio playback In vehicles equipped with a single drive, you have the option of playing back the audio track of a DVD, even when no video playback is pos- sible in the vehicle.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select "DVD" and press the controller.
4. Switch into the second field if necessary, select the desired DVD and press the con- troller.
Displaying DVD audio contents DVDs are usually divided into titles that are divided into chapters. The playback begins with the title that contains the most chapters. For example, this has the advantage that the intro- duction of a DVD is not played first.
All of the chapters, numbered all the way through, are show, i.e. the numbering is differ- ent than on the DVD. The numbering of the DVD is displayed in the status line.
Example:
Chapter 06 of the selection corresponds to chapter 4 in title 1 of the DVD.
Since the first title is not played automatically, the display in the chapter selection can begin with a higher number than 01.
The behavior during playback of the DVD can differ, depending on the DVD. It may
not be possible to play some DVDs or the play- back may stop before the end. In this case, the system usually skips to the next DVD in the DVD changer.<
Selecting chapter Select the chapter by turning the controller.
If playback does not automatically continue after the end of a title, then use the controller to select the next chapter.
A maximum of 99 chapters of a DVD can be played back.
Display in the status line Display in the chapter selection
Title 1 Chapter 1 01
Chapter 2 02
Title 2 Chapter 1 03
Chapter 2 04
Chapter 3 05
Chapter 4 06
Title 3 Chapter 1 07
Chapter 2 08
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
185
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Tone control In DVDs with multichannel or surround sound, for optimum playback, select an audio track with multichannel sound, refer to Selecting audio language, and set the tone settings to Surround, refer to Professional HiFi System* on page 163.
Selecting audio language If there are different languages on a DVD, you can select the language.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Language / Audio format" and press the controller.
The different languages of the DVD are dis- played.
3. Select the desired language and press the controller.
The languages and audio tracks are generally accompanied by an indication of how may channels are included. 5.1 means multichannel.
Notes The DVD changer can play back the following formats:
> DVD video
> Video CD
> CD-DA
> CD-DTS
> Compressed audio files
MACROVISION This product includes copyright-protected technology that is based on a series of regis- tered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other man- ufacturers. Use of this copyrighted material must be approved by Macrovision. Unless oth- erwise agreed upon with Macrovision, it is only permissible for correspondingly protected media to be produced for private use. The copying of this technology is strictly forbidden.
Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Labo- ratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic", "MLP Lossless" and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS "DTS" and "DTS Digital Surround" are regis- tered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
A U
X -I
n co
nn ec
ti o
n
186
AUX-In connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g. an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi- cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted via iDrive.
Connecting Open the lid of the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks through the car's loud- speaker system, connect the headphone or line-out port of the device with the AUX-In con- nection.
Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.
Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can save the function "AUX" on the pro- grammable memory/direct selection buttons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
187
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
USB audio interface
You can connect audio devices to the USB audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device (MP3 player, USB memory stick). You can then operate these with iDrive.
The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, as well as playback lists in the M3U format can be played back.
Due to the large number of audio devices avail- able on the market, operation via the vehicle cannot be ensured for every audio device. Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which audio devices are suitable.
Connecting Open the lid of the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
iPod To connect the iPod, use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPods. For more information, please contact a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or consult our website: www.bmw.com
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the iPod to the connections 1 and 2. The menu structure of the iPod is supported by the USB audio interface.
USB device Use a flexible adapter cable for connec- tion to protect the USB interface and your
USB device from mechanical damage.<
For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the USB device to the connec- tion 2.
After connecting for the first time, the informa- tion of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genres) and the playback lists of the USB device are trans- ferred to the vehicle. This process can take some time. The time required is dependent on the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During the transfer you can select the tracks via the directories and file names.
Following the transfer you can call up the tracks via the information and playback lists.
The information of up to four USB devices or for a total of approx. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, then the infor- mation about existing tracks is deleted if neces- sary.
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive If the audio device has a device name, this will be displayed if possible.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
*
U S
B a
u d
io in
te rf
ac e
188
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio device and press the controller.
The playback starts with the first track.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can save the function "USB" on the pro- grammable memory/direct selection buttons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track You can call up the tracks via the playback lists and information. With USB devices you can also call up the tracks via the file directory. The titles can be displayed if they are stored in the Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art- ists", and press the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information on track You can display any information stored on the current track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis- played.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
189
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Repeating a track 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.
Random play sequence You can play back the tracks of the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of an artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To end random playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.
Notes Do not subject the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- ating manual of the audio device. Otherwise the audio device may be damaged, impairing driv- ing safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Information on connection > The USB audio interface supplies the con-
nected audio device with power, provided the audio device supports this function. Therefore, do not connect the USB audio device to a socket in the vehicle during operation.
> Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or lamps, to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the audio interface to recharge external devices.
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
190
DVD system in rear
With the DVD system in the rear you can play CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image data. External audio and video devices can also be connected and played via the DVD system in the rear. Tone output is possible both via headphones and via the vehicle loudspeakers.
You can operate the DVD system in the rear with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or with the remote control.
Some functions can only be operated with the remote control.<
Enabling DVD system Enable the DVD system with iDrive. For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Unlock rear menu" and press the controller.
5. Select "Rear enabled" and press the con- troller.
The DVD system is enabled.
Controls
1 Display screen
2 Infrared interface for headphones
3 CD/DVD player
4 Headphone connection: Jack 1/8 in/3.5 mm
5 12 V sockets, refer to page 118
Folding in display screen When using the ski bag or when transporting bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen should be folded in, as otherwise it may be dam- aged.
When the display screen is folded in, do not open the covers of the center armrest
or rest your arm on the display screen as this can damage the screen.<
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
191
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
1. Turn display screen, arrow 1. The display screen switches off.
2. Fold in display screen, arrow 2.
The display screen is folded out in the reverse order.
CD/DVD player
Controls
1 Press: switching DVD system on/off Turn: volume for headphones on left
2 Eject CD, DVD
3 Start of track, reverse Stop Playback, pause, hold screen Next track, fast forward
4 CD/DVD bay
5 Connection for external device: Cinch sockets with protective cap
6 Press: switching DVD system on/off Turn: volume for headphones on right
Connecting headphones You can connect headphones with a jack plug 1/8 in/3.5 mm or operate them using the infra- red interface.
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which infrared headphones are supported by the infrared interface.
When using infrared headphones, the infrared connection between the head-
phones and the infrared interface may not be interrupted. This means that no obstacle may be located between them and the cover of the infrared interface may not be covered or scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions, such as glaring ambient light, can result in poor reception.<
Remote control
1 Menu navigation
2 Volume for headphones with jack plug
3 Change track or chapter with CD or DVD playback, fast forward/reverse
4 Switch over headphones right/left
5 Open start menu for DVD system
Menu navigation You can navigate through the menus with the knurled wheel 1 and the buttons 1. For operat- ing principle also refer to iDrive, page 16.
> Turn the knurled wheel 1: Selecting a menu item.
> Press buttons 1: Changing between fields.
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
192
> Press the button: Activating menu item.
Changing batteries
1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and installa- tion position are marked on the bottom of the battery compartment.
3. Close the cover.
Return used batteries to a recycling col- lection point or to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Sound output via loudspeakers In addition to the headphones, you can also play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers.
As soon as a plug is inserted in the AUX-In con- nection in the center console, the sound output of the DVD system via the vehicle loudspeakers is interrupted.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".
3. Select "AUX / Rear" and press the control- ler.
Switching DVD system on/off Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD system switches on automatically when a CD or DVD is inserted.
Playing CD/DVD The menu item with which the contents of the CD/DVD can be called up is dependent on the data on a CD or DVD:
> Video data via "DVD"
> Audio data via "CD"
> Images via "Photo"
Playing videos from CD/DVD
Country codes of DVDs Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod- ing of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The country codes supported by your DVD are con- tained in the information on your DVD.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
193
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
An overview of the coding zones:
Starting playback 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback usually begins automatically after a few seconds.
> If playback does not begin automatically: Select "DVD". Press the button.
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific menu is displayed for a DVD, select the desired option for menu guidance with the remote control buttons.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
You can control the playback with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Video CDs, VCD, and Super Video CDs, SVCD, can be played like DVDs if they do
not have a DVD menu of their own.<
Ejecting CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
DVD control With the DVD control, you can select the track and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and operate functions such as Language, Fast for- ward and Reverse or Freeze frame. A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible to operate the DVD control under these circum- stances. In this case, try to make the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.
2. Press the buttons on the remote control or turn the knurled wheel to select the desired function.
3. Press the button.
The DVD control disappears again after a short time if you have not selected a function.
Or:
Press the button on the remote control to exit the DVD control.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVD
Start playback
Stop playback
Activate and deactivate freeze frame
Skip chapter
Fast forward/reverse
"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
194
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control 1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
4. Press the button several times to increase the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse with remote control Press and hold the button until you reach the desired point.
Or:
1. During playback, turn the knurled wheel. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the knurled wheel. The speed is increased.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player. Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Skipping chapter You can change to the next or previous chapter during playback.
1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing until you reach the desired chapter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired chapter.
Freeze frame 1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
To continue playback:
1. Select the or symbol.
2. Press the button.
As an alternative you can also stop and con- tinue playback with the button on the CD/DVD player.
Making settings for DVD 1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of screen display
> Additional settings can be made after changing to the top field. "Language": system language of DVD system in rear. "Display": background brightness of screen.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
195
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared headphones.
> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.
> "DVD format":
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
> "Language": Language or sound track of DVD playback. The language advances one setting each time the menu item is selected.
> "Subtitles": Language of subtitles "00 n/a": no subtitles.
> "Title": Selection of a single track of the DVD.
> "Angle of view": Camera angle Notes or symbols that appear during the playback of a film generally point out differ- ent camera angles. These are usually only briefly available.
> "Menu": Call up the DVD-specific menu.
> "Return": Exit menu or: Press the buttons on the remote con- trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari- ous languages or scene descriptions for the hearing impaired. These functions are stored on the DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu. Refer to the information on your DVD for possi- ble selections. Menu entries that appear in gray cannot be selected.<
Opening DVD-specific menu Additional functions may be available on DVDs. For example, it is possible to select from several possible plots or display information on the film.
1. Press the button on the remote con- trol during playback.
2. Select "Menu".
3. Press the button.
On some DVDs, selecting "Menu" and "Title" gives you the option of
selecting from additional menus.<
To make a selection:
1. Use the buttons on the remote control to select the desired function in the DVD-spe- cific menu.
2. Press the button.
You can also select language, subtitles, camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu. Consult the documentation for your DVD.<
Compressed video files
Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
196
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Playback functions 1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a menu item:
> "Play": Start playback.
> "Pause": Stop and continue playback.
> "Repeat track": Repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory": Repeat the tracks in the current direc- tory.
4. Press the button.
Playing audio tracks from CD/DVD
Start playback Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback begins automatically after a few seconds.
> If playback does not begin automatically: Select "CD". Press the button.
For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to page 197, it may take several minutes to read the data depending on the directory struc- ture.
To start playback when there is already a CD/DVD in the drive:
1. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.
2. Select "CD".
As an alternative you can also control the play- back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
To eject CD/DVD:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
197
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD/DVD player Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.
Via the remote control Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly or turn the knurled wheel until you reach the desired track. Playback begins at the start of the track.
Settings and playback functions for audio CDs/DVDs 1. Select "SET".
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared headphones.
> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.
> "Pause": Stop and continue playback.
> "Random": In this mode, the tracks on the CD/DVD are played once in a random sequence.
> "Scan": Automatically briefly sample all tracks of the CD/DVD consecutively.
> "Repeat": Repeat the current track. Select again to end.
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.
Remote control:
Press and hold the button until you reach the desired point.
Compressed audio files With some CDs/DVDs playback may automati- cally start with the first track.
Playback 1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
198
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Settings and playback functions for compressed audio files 1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Separately adjustable for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared headphones.
> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.
> "Pause": Stop or continue playback.
> "Scan directory": Briefly sample the tracks in the current directory.
> "Scan all": Briefly sample all tracks.
> "Random directory": Play the tracks in the current directory in a random sequence.
> "Random all": Play all tracks in a random sequence.
> "Repeat track": Repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory": Repeat the tracks in the current directory.
> "Details": Display any stored information on the cur- rent track.
Displaying images from CD/DVD 1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.
3. Select "Photo".
4. Press the button.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
199
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Displaying overview 1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.
2. Select "Overview".
3. Press the button. It may take some time until the overview is completely displayed.
4. Scroll through the overview with the menu guidance of the remote control.
If a symbol is shown instead of an image, then the image cannot be shown in the
overview.<
Displaying images 1. Select an image with the buttons of the
remote control.
2. Press the button.
3. Select type of display:
> Scroll with the menu guidance buttons of the remote control.
> Show slide show: Turn the knurled wheel to set the display duration and the sequence of the dis- play. Stop slide show: Select "Stop".
Adjusting 1. Press the button.
2. Select a menu item:
3. Press the button.
Ending display 1. Press the button.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
Ejecting CD/DVD Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Function
Return to the photo menu
"SET" "Display": adjusting the bright- ness of the screen. "Language": the language of the system can be set after changing to the top field
Start slide show.
Show first/last image
Rotate image by 90
"Overview" Change to image overview
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
200
Information on CD/DVD player
Safety notes The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser product. Do not operate if the cover
is damaged or open, otherwise severe eye dam- age can result.<
Suitable media Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become
detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm. Never play CDs/DVDs with adapters, e.g. sin- gle-CDs, as otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may not be ejected. Never use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus or hybrid disks, as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and may not be ejected.<
The CD/DVD player can play the following media:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA (Audio CD)
> CDs/DVDs with compressed image files
> CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
> CDs/DVDs with compressed video files
DVD Audio and SACD are not supported by the DVD player. However, many audio DVDs avail- able in stores also contain a video track in the DVD Video format in addition to the audio track. These DVDs can be played back by the DVD player. Please refer to the information on your DVD to determine whether your audio DVD contains an additional video track.
Depending on the authoring used, it is possible that not all functions are available during play- back.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers are coated on both sides and bear no markings. This means both sides are information carriers.
To play the information on the other side, turn over the DVD.
Supported formats Depending on the compression method used, not all files of the specified formats can be opened.
Images JPEG/JPG
With very large image files, it may take a longer time until the images are shown.
Compressed audio files > MP3
> WMA
> OGG
> AAC
Compressed video files > VCD
> SVCD
> MPEG1
> MPEG2
> MPEG4
Digital Rights Management DRM It may not be possible to play CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Management.
General malfunctions The BMW CD/DVD player is optimized for oper- ation in the vehicle. It may react more sensi- tively to defective CDs/DVDs than devices intended for stationary use.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.
Make sure that no foreign bodies or liq- uids enter the CD-/DVD bay, as otherwise
the CD/DVD player will be damaged.<
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
201
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes.
Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsis- tent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the side with the label using a pen intended for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois- ture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro- tection feature by the manufacturer. As a result, some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be played to a limited degree, or cause the system to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and then switch the system back on again. Then remove the CD/DVD from the drive.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files If the language set for the CD/DVD player does not match the language of the music track, the music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
Care instructions Do not use cleaning CDs with a brush.
External device
Connecting
1 Connections for audio/video cables: Watch the colors of the sockets when con- necting. Yellow socket: video White socket: audio left Red socket: audio right
2 Power supply for external device: sockets with removable cap, also refer to page 118
Playback 1. Switch on the external device and start the
playback.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con- trol.
3. Select "AUX".
4. Press the button.
For devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3 players, "No video signal" is shown. The sound is nevertheless played.
D V
D s
ys te
m in
re ar
202
Settings for external devices 1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of video playback.
> "NTSC color": The color can be adjusted on an external device with the NTSC standard.
> "Standard": The DVD system in the rear can be adapted to external devices with various TV standards. When doing so, also refer to the operating manual of the external device.
> "Reset": The settings are reset to the default value.
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance" can be adjusted for the left and right-hand headphones and the infrared head- phones.
> "Reset": Your settings are reset.
> Additional settings can be made after changing to the top field. "Audio": adjust the volume of the exter- nal device to the volume of the CD/DVD player. "Language": system language of the DVD system in the rear. "Display": background brightness of screen.
> "Video Format":
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
203
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Communications This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
206
Telephoning
The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After pairing a suitable mobile phone in the vehicle once, you can oper- ate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is automatically detected again with the engine running or the ignition switched on as soon as it is in the vehicle interior. The pairing data of up to four mobile phones can be stored simulta- neously. If several mobile phones are detected simultaneously, the respective last mobile phone paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone cradle, enables the battery to be charged and the mobile phone to be connected to the exter- nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures improved network reception and a consistent voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile phones snap-in adapters are offered for.
For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa- tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis- tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package or which mobile phones snap-in adapters are available for. These mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual with a certain software version. Mal- functions can occur with other mobile phones.
Care instructions You can find what you need to know about car- ing for your mobile phone in the Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the separate mobile phone operating instructions.
Operating options You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 212
> Voice commands, refer to page 217
> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.
Placing phone calls with BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist calls You can use the BMW Assist system via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "Communication" or "BMW Assist" is displayed in "BMW Ser- vice", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con- nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in
*
207
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
progress. If this happens, you must log off the mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.
Commissioning
Logging on mobile phone on vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone prep- aration package. Information on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to page 211, and on the mobile phone is active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to adjust the presets of the mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection not with confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone.
> For pairing, specify any desired number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue- tooth passkey is no longer required follow- ing successful logon.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi- cle stopped, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.<
Switching on ignition 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ Stop button without depressing the brake pedal.
Preparation via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to open the start menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
208
7. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con- troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control- ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.
Preparation with mobile phone 10. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending on the model, refer to the operating instruc- tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con- nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.
Pairing Depending on your mobile phone, you will first be requested consecutively via the display of your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue- tooth passkey you specified.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, approx. 30 seconds are available for entering the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.
13. Change into the third field from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.
14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communica- tion" menu appears.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max- imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
With some mobile phone models it may be necessary to make certain settings for
a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu item Authorization or Secure connection, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.<
209
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen- dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat- ing instructions of your mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec- utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the pairing data of the mobile phone for which the pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will be deleted.
Check if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor- mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be connected to the mobile phone. Delete the connection to other devices if necessary.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con- troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact BMW Customer Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations: Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number of BMW Customer Rela- tions and information required for pairing is shown on the display. With mobile phones already paired, you can select the phone num- ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish the connection.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
210
List of paired mobile phones The mobile phones for which the vehicle has stored the pairing data can be displayed. If sev- eral paired mobile phones are detected by the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi- cle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper- ated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change to the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con- troller.
The selected mobile phone is moved upward by one position.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data of the mobile phone.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to open the start menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. "Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change to the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
211
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com- puter.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac- tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
212
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions via iDrive:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone book
> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls.
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after removing the remote control from the ignition lock, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.
Speech quality If the person you are talking to cannot under- stand you well, this may be due to excessively loud background noises. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain degree.
To optimize the speech quality during a call, we recommend that you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing the air volume of the automatic climate control or pointing the opened front air vents downward
> Reduce volume of hands-free system
Requirements > The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi- cle.
Opening Communication You operate many of the functions described in the following via the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Com- munication".
Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num- ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.
213
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
"Accept" is selected. Press the controller.
Rejecting a call Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing the individual digits and pressing the con- troller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the digits on the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit: Move the controller toward the right to select the arrow and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler. Alternative: press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are calling, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your service pro- vider.
With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store phone numbers on the program- mable memory/direct selection buttons to call them directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
1. Select the phone number and press the controller.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
214
2. "End call" is selected. Press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone book or a phone number stored in a list Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls and the entries of the phone book are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in the phone book, the name of the entry is dis- played instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z" The entries of the mobile-phone phone book, consisting of the name and phone number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8" The eight numbers called most frequently from the phone book "A - Z" are automati- cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial" The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls" The phone numbers of the last eight calls which were not accepted are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.
> "Received calls" The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.
Dialing phone numbers from phone book The list "A - Z" is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries, select the first letter of the desired entry and press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.
You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
215
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
Deleting individual entries 1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list 1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.
3. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.
BMW Contact* If you are not enabled for BMW Assist, you can have several service phone numbers displayed:
> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, e.g. when you want to make an appointment for service
> BMW Customer Relations* for information on all aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 221.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
216
You can select the displayed service phone number if your mobile phone is logged on in the vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con- troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
Transferring phone number via tone dialing method The tone dialing method is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection has been established.
1. Establish connection.
2. With a single drive: Press the controller. Select "Keypad" and press the controller. With two drives: Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired characterand press the controller. Each character is sent immediately and confirmed by a tone depending on the mobile phone model.
217
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Changing between mobile phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free system* You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys- tem when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches over to the handsfree mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically switch over to the handsfree mode:
> Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can be continued via the hands-free system if necessary. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the button above the storage compartment.
From handsfree system to mobile phone When you telephone via the handsfree system, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- ating instructions of your mobile phone.
As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue- tooth link.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor reception of the wireless communications net- work can result in the system changing from the hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to remove your hands from the steering wheel. When making your entries, you will be supported by announcements or questions in many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via iDrive apply, refer to page 212.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice Press the button on the steering wheel or
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command, e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. You can have the possible commands spoken by the system at any point:
Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...}Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
218
Example: dialing phone numbers To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting volume of instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is established.
Correcting phone number After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book Operating by voice command requires a per- sonal voice phone book.
> With separate drives for audio CDs and nav- igation DVDs, the entries are automatically applied from your mobile phone's memory.
> With a single drive, the entries must be entered by voice and are independent of your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in the mobile phone or to store new numbers. Up to 50 entries can be input. An entry always con- sists of a name and phone number.
Command The voice control answers
{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or {{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial} {{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
219
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Creating and editing voice phone book* Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the phone book.
Have entries read aloud and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select a certain entry to establish a connection:
Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.
Redialing The {Redial} command opens "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands For voice commands, keep the following in mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor- mal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from ambi- ent noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
1. {Save name}. The dialog for storing a name is opened.
2. Speak the name. The spoken length of the names in the phone book must not exceed approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number when prompted.
4. To store the phone number: {Save}.
1. {Delete name}. The dialog for deleting an entry is opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is read aloud.
1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
220
Mounting/removing snap-in adapter 1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover*.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and press down until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter: Press down on region 1.
Inserting mobile phone 1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone battery is charged from the radio readiness position.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
221
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transferred to the BMW Assist Response Center if an emergency request* has been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. After the BMW Assist system has been deacti- vated, no BMW Assist service will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a new contract.
Requirements If the following requirements are met, you can use BMW Assist:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged in on a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit- ting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 226.
Offered services The following services are available via BMW Assist:
> Emergency requests, refer to page 252: When you press the SOS button, a connec- tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic collision notification: Under certain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced roadside assistance: You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process.
> BMW Customer Relations: For information on all aspects of your vehi- cle, you can be connected to BMW Cus- tomer Relations.
> TeleService: The data on the service status of your vehi- cle or on required inspections are transmit- ted to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center either automatically prior to the due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote door unlock: Inform the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. if your remote control is not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.
> Stolen vehicle recovery: After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position.
In addition, you can be provided with other ser- vices, e.g. the concierge service or information on route planning, traffic conditions, and the
*
B M
W A
ss is
t
222
weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. if you do not have your mobile phone with you. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
You also have access to the BMW Assist con- cierge service via the Internet.
Characteristics of offered services The following special aspects apply to the ser- vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.
> The data transferred can, for example, be the vehicle data, your current position or the data of the CBS Condition Based Service.
Using services
Contact to BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press protective cover to open. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center is con- tacted.
Roadside assistance iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.
If the current position can be determined, the current vehicle location is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the BMW Roadside Assistance.
223
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
TeleService
Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto- matically directly to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center was notified.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con- troller.
Manual service notification You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's service status to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center when you wish to arrange a ser- vice appointment.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Service Request".
5. Press the controller.
B M
W A
ss is
t
224
6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
The data relevant for service are transmitted. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will contact you to set up an appointment for ser- vice.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations For information on all aspects of your vehicle, you can contact BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
You are connected to BMW Customer Rela- tions by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Concierge service* When you call the BMW Assist concierge ser- vice, you can, for example, obtain information on current events, filling stations or hotels and have their phone numbers and addresses transmitted. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW concierge service.
The concierge service must be enabled sepa- rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling up information 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control- ler.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the con- troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist concierge.
225
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Displaying transferred data Select the received message if necessary and press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> With "Call" you can establish a telephone connection. A prerequisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.
> With "Select as destination" you can trans- fer the address to the navigation system for destination guidance.
Customizing BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services You will be notified of any changes in the ser- vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you should update the service functions.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller. The currently available BMW Assist ser- vices are displayed.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.
B M
W A
ss is
t
226
Blocking services* If you block the services, the connection to BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.
The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the cur- rent vehicle position will not be transferred dur- ing an emergency request*. To cancel the blocking, and reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This does not affect the contractual agreements.
Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to re- enable.
Activating BMW Assist BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser- vices.
Requirements > Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during the activation process.
Activating 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
227
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. BMW Assist is enabled and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues to run in the background.
Displaying vehicle data When BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle may be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Profile" is selected and press the controller.
Mobility This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance.
R ef
u el
in g
230
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling. When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and regula- tions. Never transport reserve fuel containers in the vehicle. These could become leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler door. To do this, briefly press the lower edge.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.
Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
Do not crush the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.
Releasing manually If an electrical malfunction should occur, you can unlock the fuel filler door manually.
1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels, follow the safety precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to
> premature pump shutoff
> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
M o
b il
it y
231
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Fuel specifications Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise damage to the catalytic converter will
result. Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85% ethanol, or Flex Fuel, otherwise permanent damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- tem will result.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif- ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain- ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi- tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
232
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety The condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only to the tire's service life, but also to driving com- fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire*: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this pre- caution, you may be driving on tires with incor- rect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci- dent. Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat tires, except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seri- ously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 92.<
Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW Sports Activ- ity Vehicle Center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- ing:
> Tire sizes of your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for speeds up to 100 mph/160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column Traveling speeds up to max. of 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam- age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<
M o
b il
it y
233
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the law could occur.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
234
Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive 35i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL
32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 33/230 39/270
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Compact wheel*: T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/90 R 18 113 M
61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420 61/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 260.
M o
b il
it y
235
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.
Tire size
Speed letter Q= up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 3907 indicates that the tire was manufactured in week 39 of 2007.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.
Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con- trolled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<
Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Belted construction radial Rim diameter in inches Carrying capacity ID-code (not in ZR tires) Speed code letter (in ZR tires before the R)
255/55 R 18 109 H
e.g.
Manufacturer code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0806
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
236
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 237.
M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.
XL Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base are distributed over the tire's circumference and are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.
Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazards and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These kinds of problems may also be signaled by other changes in vehicle response, such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
M o
b il
it y
237
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire. Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce- ment ensures that the tire retains some residual safety in the event of pressure drop and driving remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire page 90
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure page 92
New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam- age and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires BMW does not recommend that you use retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possi- bly different tire casing structures and the often wide variations in their age, which can result in a limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions than the approved units these differences could lead to body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot be held liable for driving safety.<
When changing to larger wheels and tires, it may be necessary to make changes to
the wheelwell trim piece, as otherwise road users could be endangered or the vehicle could be damaged. Only have this work carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained per- sonnel.<
You can ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center for the correct wheel/tire combination.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects various systems whose function would other- wise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC, xDrive, Dynamic Performance Control, or Flat Tire Monitor.
To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single tread config- uration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
238
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire, refer to page 91. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW depending on the tire size. You can recognize these from the clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with the most demanding standards for safety and vehicle response.
Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Paying attention to speed Always observe the maximum permissi- ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci- dents.<
Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles Even with tires of the same size, BMW recommends that you not rotate the front
tires to the rear or vice versa as this can nega- tively affect handling characteristics. When the vehicle is equipped with different tires sizes*, rotating tires from one axle to the other is not permitted.<
Snow chains* BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains, classifies them as road-safe and recommends them. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can provide you with this information.
It is only permissible to use snow chains in pairs, on the 255/50 R 19 rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not ini- tialize the Flat Tire Monitor*, as otherwise
incorrect displays can occur. When you are driving with snow chains, it can be beneficial to activate DTC briefly, refer to page 86.<
M o
b il
it y
239
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If you do not know what repair procedures to fol- low, have work on your vehicle done only by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result. If you see any signs that the hood is not com- pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you should stop at once and close it securely.<
U n
d er
th e
h o
o d
240
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp and windshield cleaning systems, refer to page 65
2 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil on page 241
3 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 253
4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 242
Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication of the oil level possible is measurement with the engine at operating temperature, i.e. following an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km. You can display the oil level while driving or when stopped on a level surface with the engine running.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
M o
b il
it y
241
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the control- ler. The oil level is displayed.
Possible messages > "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement...": Engine oil level is being measured. This process can take approx. 3 minutes when stopped on a level surface and approx. 5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil.": Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next opportunity.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter- val for engine oil": Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- age until the next oil change service, refer to Service requirements on page 72. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corre- sponding message is shown on the Control Dis- play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into contact with oil should be thoroughly washed with soap and water. Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and observe the warnings on the containers to pre- vent health risks.<
Oil change Only have an oil change carried out by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel.
Approved engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives, as these may result in engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is unavailable, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only use oils of the specification API SM or higher.
U n
d er
th e
h o
o d
242
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to answer detailed ques-
tions on BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity grades Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on the climatic conditions in the region in which you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the SAE grades 5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.
Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a coolant additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can recommend suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instruc- tions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter- clockwise to allow any accumulated pres- sure to escape, then continue turning to open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the cool- ant level is between the MIN and MAX marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.
M o
b il
it y
243
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system
The BMW maintenance system supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The ultimate objective is to ensure economical maintenance by providing the ideal service for your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell your BMW, a complete dealer service history will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show remaining distances and times of selected maintenance intervals and legally mandated deadlines, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations
Service data in remote control Your vehicle stores the information required for maintenance continuously in the remote con- trol during driving. After accessing the data stored in the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of service procedures for your own individual vehi- cle. You should therefore hand over the remote control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser- vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer to page 79, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.
BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<
M ai
n te
n an
ce
244
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the exhaust-gas composition can be checked via the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located to the left on the driver's side, on the underside of the instrument panel under a cover.
Exhaust-gas values The warning lamp lights up. The exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In this case you should reduce your speed and proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage to the emission-relevant com- ponents, especially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight- ened, the OBD system will assume that
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If the cap is then tightened, the display will go out within a few days.<
Event Data Recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a device for recording or transmitting certain vehicle data or information. If you have also sub- scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can be transmitted or recorded to enable corre- sponding services.
Care Important information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
M o
b il
it y
245
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Replacing components
Onboard toolkit
The onboard toolkit is located in the cargo bay under the floor panel.
Replacing wiper blades
1. Fold down the wiper arm.
2. Swing the wiper blade upward.
3. Remove the wiper blade toward the wind- shield, refer to arrow.
Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent in replacing them. BMW recommends having your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center per- form any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its metal socket.<
A replacement bulb set is available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only replace bulbs when cool, as other- wise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits from occurring. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<
For care and maintenance of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which replacement is not described and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Xenon light These bulbs have a very long service life and the probability of a failure is very low. If one of these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possi- ble to continue driving with great caution using the fog lamps, provided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit this.
R ep
la ci
n g
c o
m p
o n
en ts
246
Have work on the xenon light unit includ- ing changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when work is carried out improperly.<
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, and daytime running lamps 35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replace- ment.<
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Left side of vehicle: Rotate the bulb holder to the right, refer to arrow, and remove. Right side of vehicle: Rotate the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps 5-Watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signals, front 24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it along with the bulb.
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Tail lamps > Turn signal, backup lamps: 21-watt bulb,
H21W
> Brake lamps, brake force display: 21-watt bulb, P21W
> Rear lamp: LED technology. In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work- shop that works according to BMW repair
M o
b il
it y
247
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1 Brake force display/tail lamps
2 Brake lamps/tail lamps
3 Backup lamp
4 Turn signal
Brake lamp 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signal 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Backup lamp 1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian- gle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Brake force display 1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
R ep
la ci
n g
c o
m p
o n
en ts
248
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and engage it.
5. Replace the cover.
License plate lamp 5-Watt bulb, C5W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw- driver, refer to arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.
Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as standard. As a result, it is not necessary to change the wheel immediately in the case of air loss in the event of a breakdown.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire page 90
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure page 92
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires, page 237.
When mounting new tires, or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. No spare tire is avail- able in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you. Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 237.
Suitable tools for changing tires are avail- able as accessories at your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Jacking points for vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located in the positions shown.
Compact wheel* Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers. Set the parking brake and engage transmission position P. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
M o
b il
it y
249
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
and ensure that they remain outside the imme- diate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi- cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu- lations. Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as snow, ice, tiles, etc. Position the jack on a firm support surface. Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack, as this would prevent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load-carrying capacity. To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is supported by the jack.<
What you will need To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi- tions of the tools before removing them, then return them to their initial positions after com- pleting work. The tools are located in the mount under the floor panel flap.
1 Vehicle jack* 2 Vehicle jack crank* 3 Lug wrench*
Removing compact wheel The compact wheel is located in the cargo bay under the floor panel.
1. Remove the tool mount.
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel.
Preparing wheel change 1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle 1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur- face of the jack base rests on the ground perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and personal injury.<
R ep
la ci
n g
c o
m p
o n
en ts
250
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular recess of the jacking point when cranking up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel 1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel. Secure the wheel by screwing at least two lug bolts into opposite bolt holes. When you mount wheels other than Genu- ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from beneath the vehicle.
After mounting 1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to ensure that they are tightened to the speci- fied torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tight- ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.<
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo bay.
The defective wheel cannot be stored under the floor panel flap due to its
size.<
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve screw caps against dirt and contamination.
Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 92.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi- ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Driving with compact wheel Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
The driving characteristics change, for example reduced track stability on braking, extended braking distance, and altered self-steering characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction with winter tires, these characteristics are more pronounced.
Only one compact wheel may be mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to
their original size as quickly as possible. Failure to do so is a safety risk.<
Vehicle battery
Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine switched off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 253.
M o
b il
it y
251
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Disposal Have old batteries disposed of following replacement at your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or bring them to a collection point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport.<
Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings are also lost and must be updated:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 44.
> Time and Date The values must be updated, refer to pages 78, 79.
> Radio Stations must be stored again if necessary, refer to page 166.
> Navigation system Wait until the system starts, refer to page 156.
Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses, a pair of plastic tweezers and infor- mation on the fuse assignment are located near the fuses in the cargo bay.
In interior The fuses are located in the front passenger footwell on the underside of the instrument panel.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell trim panel.
2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Unscrew the screw, arrow 1, and fold down the fuse carrier, arrow 2.
4. Replace the fuse concerned.
5. Installation is carried out in the reverse order of removal. Ensure correct and secure attachment of the footwell trim panel in the process.
In cargo bay
Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo bay.
G iv
in g
a n
d re
ce iv
in g
a ss
is ta
n ce
252
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request Conditions for an emergency request:
> Full preparation package mobile phone. With this equipment, an emergency request is still possible when no mobile phone is paired in the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 226.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged in on a wireless communications network.
> The emergency request system is opera- ble.
When the contract of participation with BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center without having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, emergency requests are not possible. The BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a new contract.
Initiating an emergency request 1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 sec- onds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.
When the emergency request is received at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes fur- ther steps to help you. Even if you are unable to answer, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain conditions.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.
If the current position of your vehicle can be determined, it will be forwarded to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear the BMW Assist Response Center through the hands-free system, this could indicate, for instance, that the hands-free system is no longer operational. However, you may then still be audible for the BMW Assist Response Cen- ter.
Under certain conditions, an emergency request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. The automatic collision notification is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
M o
b il
it y
253
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the cargo bay. Open the left-hand side panel.
Press the tab to release.
First-aid kit* Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace the contents concerned in good time if necessary.
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo bay. Open left side panel, remove warning triangle.
Roadside Assistance* The BMW Roadside Assistance offers you assistance in the event of a breakdown around the clock, including on weekends and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.
With BMW Assist or TeleService, you can con- tact BMW Roadside Assistance for assistance in the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, refer to page 222.
Jump starting When your battery is discharged, you can use two jumper cables to start your BMW with power from the battery in a second vehicle. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care- fully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com- ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol- low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
On your BMW the so-called starting-aid termi- nal in the engine compartment acts as the bat- tery positive terminal, also refer to the engine compartment overview on page 240. The cover cap is marked with +.
G iv
in g
a n
d re
ce iv
in g
a ss
is ta
n ce
254
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting- aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+ to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid- ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a start- ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/ to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting engine 1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<
Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car- ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the toolkit under the floor panel flap in the cargo bay, refer to page 245.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi- cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<
Access to screw thread Cover panel on left and right side of bumper: press on the arrow symbol on the cover panel.
Front
M o
b il
it y
255
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Rear
Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 56, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available. When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. This then requires increased effort for braking and steer- ing. Active steering is deactivated and larger steering wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend- ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys- tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Before towing, manually unlock the trans- mission lock, refer to page 63; failure to
do so can result in damage to the transmis- sion.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/ 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country.
With tow bar The towing vehicle may not be lighter than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will exert lateral forces, tending to push the vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage.<
With tow truck Do not tow your BMW with the front or rear axle raised individually; otherwise,
the wheels may lock and the transfer case may be damaged.<
Only have your BMW transported on a flat bed.
Tow-starting The engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Start the engine by jump starting it, refer to page 253. Have the cause of the starting difficulties elimi- nated.
Reference This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command system, and the index that will direct you as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
f r
T ec
h n
ic al
d at
a
258
Technical data
Engine data
X6 xDrive 35i
Displacement cu in/cm 181.8/2,979
No. of cylinders 6
Maximum output hp 300
at engine speed rpm 5800-6250
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407
at engine speed rpm 1400-5000
R e
fe re
n ce
259
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Dimensions
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.
T ec
h n
ic al
d at
a
260
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.
X6 xDrive 35i
Curb weight Ibs./kg 4,894/2,220
Approved gross vehicle weight Ibs./kg 6,085/2,760
Load Ibs./kg 1,191/540
Approved front axle load Ibs./kg 2,910/1,320
Approved rear axle load Ibs.kg 3,241/1,470
Approved roof load capacity Ibs./kg 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 25.6-59.7/570-1,450
R e
fe re
n ce
261
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 231
of that reserve US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8
Windshield washer with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 For more details: page 65
S h
o rt
c o
m m
an d
s o
f v o
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
262
Short commands of voice command system
With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select display in assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or {Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 150 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or {Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 207 {Phone}
To dial phone number 213 {Dial number}
To display phone book 214 {A to Z}
To dial from phone book 214 {Call ...} or {Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 215 {Top 8}
To redial 214 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 215 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 215 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 210 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 222 {BMW Assist}
To open "BMW Service" 222 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 215 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 215 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 222 {Roadside Assistance}
R e
fe re
n ce
263
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation system 136 {Navigation}
To open "Enter address" 137 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 137 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 141 {Input map}
To display destination list 143 {Destination list}
To display address book 144 {Address book}
To display route criteria 146 {Route preference}
To start destination guidance 148 {Start guidance}
To end destination guidance 148 {Stop guidance}
To display arrow display 149 {Arrow display}
To display map display 150 {Map}, {Map facing north}, {Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}
To change scale 150 {Scale ... miles} or {Scale ... feet}
To display roads or towns/cities along route 150 {Route list}
To switch on voice instructions 151 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 151 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 151 {Repeat navigation info}
To open route 146, 150 {Route menu}
To open "New route" 152 {New route}
To display current position 155 {Current position}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 70 {Car data}
To display computer 70 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 71 {Trip computer}
To open stopwatch 77 {Stopwatch}
To open speed limit 77 {Limit}
To activate speed limit 77 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 77 {Limit off}
S h
o rt
c o
m m
an d
s o
f v o
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
264
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 161 {Audio}
To switch on radio 164 {Radio on}, {FM} or {AM}
To open "FM" 164 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 164 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 164 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 164 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC} or {Choose station}
To open "Presets" 164 {FM presets} or {AM presets}
To select stored radio station 164 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 165 {FM manual}, {AM manual} or {Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open strongest radio stations 165 {AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 169 {Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 169 {Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 169 {Choose weatherband station}
To open "SAT" 170 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 170 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 171 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 171 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 171 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 173 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 173 {CD}
To open CD changer 173 {CD-changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 173 {CD-changer}
To select CD 173 {CD 1...6}
To select music track 174 {CD track ...}
To select CD and music track 174 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To switch on audio playback with external audio device 186
{Audio Aux}
R e
fe re
n ce
265
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Climate
menu
Function Command
To adjust temperature distribution for front seat heating 48
{Seat heater distribution}
To open "Vent settings" 106 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 104 {Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 110 {Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 110 {Automatic ventilation}
To display activation times 110 {Activation time}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 29 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 51 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 64 {Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 72 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 72 {Service}
To open "BMW Service" 222 {BMW service settings}
To display "Check Control messages" 76 {Check Control messages}
To open "Head-Up Display" 97 {Head-up display}
To set brightness of Control Display 79 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 79 {Units}
To open "Language" 80, 151 {Language}
To open "Time" 79 {Time}
To open "Date" 79 {Date}
To open "PDC" 81 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 90 {FTM}
To open "TPM" 92 {TPM}
To display "Bluetooth" 211 {Bluetooth}
To open "HDC" 87 {HDC}
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
266
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions, and indicates where to find them in the text.
A ABS Antilock Brake
System 85 Accessories 6 Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 75 Activated-charcoal filter 108 "Activation time" for parked
car ventilation 110 Active seat 49 Active seat ventilation 48 Active steering 94 warning lamp 94 Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 94 Adaptive Drive 88 Adaptive fastening
system 120 Adaptive Head Light 101 "Add digits" for mobile
phone 214 "Address book" for
navigation 144 Address for navigation deleting 145 entering 137, 144 selecting 144 storing 144 storing current position 144 "Add to destination list" 139 Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 31 Adjusting temperature with
expanded-scope automatic climate control 105
Adjusting the tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 161
Adjusting thigh support 43, 44
"After door opened" 45 "After unlocking" 45 Airbags 95 sitting safely 42 warning lamp 96 Air distribution automatic 104, 109 manual 105 Airing, refer to Ventilation 107 Air recirculation 106 AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 106 recirculated-air mode 106 "Air recirculation on / off" 52 Air vents 103 refer to Ventilation 107 Air vents of automatic climate
control 103 Air volume 105, 109 AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 231 Alarm system 35 avoiding unintentional
alarms 36 interior motion sensor 36 switching off alarm 35 switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion sensor 36
tilt alarm sensor 36 "All channels" on satellite
radio 171 "All doors" 30 All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 238 "All stations", displaying on
radio 164
All-wheel drive, refer to xDrive 87
Alterations, technical, refer to For your own safety 5
"AM", reception range 161, 164
"Angle of view" DVD changer 183 DVD system in rear 195 Antenna for mobile phone 206 Antifreeze coolant 242 washer fluid 65 Antilock Brake System
ABS 85 Anti-theft system refer to Alarm system 35 refer to Central locking
system 29 Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 260 Approved engine oils 241 Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 260 Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 116 Around the center console 14 Around the steering wheel 10 Arrival time refer to Computer 70 refer to Starting destination
guidance 148 "Arrow display" for
navigation 149 Arrow view for navigation
system 149 Ashtray front 117 rear 117 Assist, refer to separate
operating instructions
R e
fe re
n ce
267
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Assistance systems, refer to Driving stability control systems 85
Assistance window 20 "Assist. window off" 21 AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 106 "Audio" 163, 167 for DVD system in rear 202 Audio 160 controls 160 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 Audio CD for DVD system in
rear 196 Audio device, external 116 Automatic air distribution 104, 109 air volume 104, 109 headlamp control 99 liftgate operation 34 service notification 223 steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 51 storing stations 165 Automatic car washes 128 also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure Automatic climate control 104 automatic air
distribution 104, 109 in rear 108 switching off 107, 109 ventilation in rear 108 Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft closing 33
Automatic curb monitor 50 Automatic Hold 58 activating 59 deactivating 59 parking 59
Automatic lighting refer to Automatic headlamp
control 99 refer to Daytime running
lamps 100 refer to Interior lamps 102 refer to Pathway lighting 100 "Automatic programs" 105 Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 106 Automatic soft closing 33 Automatic station search 165 Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61 deactivating selector lever
interlock 61 kick-down 62 manually releasing
transmission lock 63 tow-starting 255 with comfort access 37 "Automatic ventilation" 110 AUTO program for automatic
climate control 104, 109 "Auto Request" 223 "Autostore" on the radio 166 "AUX" 161, 186, 188 AUX-In connection 186 for DVD system in rear 201 USB audio interface 187 "AUX / Rear" 192 AUX-In connection 116, 186 Average fuel consumption 70 setting units 79 Average speed, refer to
Computer 70 "Avoid ferries" for
navigation 147 "Avoid highways" for
navigation 146 Avoiding highways for
navigation 146 Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36 "Avoid tollroads" for
navigation 147 Axle loads, refer to
Weights 260 "A - Z" 214
B Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 44 Backrests, refer to Seats 43 Backrest width adjustment 44 Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 246 Balance, refer to Tone
control 162 "Balance" for DVD system in
rear 195 Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 253 Bass, refer to Tone
control 161 Battery charging 250 jump starting 253 power failure 251 refer to Vehicle battery 250 Battery disposal remote control with comfort
access 38 vehicle battery 251 Battery replacement remote control for DVD
system in rear 192 remote control with comfort
access 38 Being towed 255 Belts, refer to Safety belts 47 Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 117 Blower, refer to Air
volume 105, 109 "BMW Assist" 222, 223, 224 BMW Assist activating 226 concierge service 224 contacting BMW Customer
Relations 224 offered services 221 roadside assistance 222 TeleService 223 "BMW Contact" 216 "BMW Contact
Numbers" 216 BMW homepage 4
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
268
BMW maintenance system 243
"BMW Service settings" 227 BMW website 4 Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 117 Brake assistant 86 Brake force display 94 Brake lamps brake force display 94 replacing bulbs 246 Brake rotors 128 Brakes ABS Antilock Brake
System 85 brake assistant 86 brake force display 94 breaking-in 126 CBC Cornering Brake
Control 85 electronic brake-force
distribution 85 parking brake 57 refer to Braking safely 127 warning lamp 13 Brake system 126 brake pads 126 breaking-in 126 disk brakes 128 Braking safely 127 Breakdown, Flat Tire
Monitor 89 Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 253 Breaking-in brake pads 126 Breaking-in differential 126 Break-in period 126 "Brightness" 79 DVD changer 182 DVD system in rear 194 Brightness of Control Display 79 of the rear view camera 85 on Head-Up Display 97 "Brightness / Position" 98 Button for starting engine 56 Buttons on steering wheel 11 Bypassing traffic
congestion 155
C Calibrating driver's seat 47 California Proposition 65
Warning 6 "Call" 214, 225 Call accepting 212 displaying accepted 215 ending 213 in absence 215 starting 213 Calling from phone book 214 from Top 8 list 215 redialing 215 refer to telephone operating
instructions Camera, refer to Rear view
camera 83 "Camera picture and PDC" 85 "Camera view: full screen" 85 "Camera view: main
window" 85 Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 117 Capacities 261 Capacity of cargo bay 260 Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 250 Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
"Car Data" 70 Care 244 refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure Cargo refer to Loading 128 securing 130 securing with ski bag 122 Cargo area, refer to Cargo
bay 119
Cargo bay capacity 260 emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33 expanding 120 opening/closing, refer to
Liftgate 33 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening with remote
control 30 Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote control 28
Car phone 206 installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 116 refer to Mobile phone 206 refer to separate operating
instructions Car radio, refer to Radio 164 Car wash 128 also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure before driving in 57 with comfort access 38 Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 127 "Categories" on satellite
radio 171 CBC Cornering Brake
Control 85 CBS Condition Based
Service 243
R e
fe re
n ce
269
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
"CD" 161, 173 for DVD system in rear 192 CD, refer to Playing audio
tracks, DVD system in rear 196
CD/DVD player, DVD system in rear 191
CD changer 173 compressed audio files 173 controls 160 fast forward/reverse 176 random sequence 176 repeating a track 175 sampling tracks 175 selecting a CD 173 selecting a track 174 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 CD player 173 compressed audio files 173 controls 160 fast forward/reverse 176 random sequence 176 repeating a track 175 sampling tracks 175 selecting a track 174 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 Cell phone, refer to Mobile
phone Center armrest front 116 rear 119 Center brake lamp 248 Center console 14 "Central locking" 30 Central locking system 29 comfort access 36 from inside vehicle 32 Changes, technical refer to For your own
safety 5 refer to Parts and
accessories 6 Changing language on
Control Display 80
Changing tires 237 Changing units of measure on
Control Display 79 Changing wheels 248 Check Control 75 "Check Control
messages" 76 Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation pressure 232
Children, transporting 53 Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 54 Child restraint systems 53 Child-safety locks 55 Child seats 53 Chime, refer to Check
Control 75 Chrome parts, care, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter, refer to Lighter 118
Cleaning, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 48 Clock 68 12h/24h mode 79 setting time 78 Closing from inside 32 using remote control 29 Closing fuel filler cap 230 Clothes hooks 116 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 57 "Color" for DVD system in
rear 194 Comfort access 36 observe in car wash 38 replacing battery 38 Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14 Comfort start, refer to Starting
engine 57 "Communica-
tion" 212, 222, 223, 224
Compact Disc refer to CD changer 173 refer to CD player 173 Compact wheel, wheel
change 248 Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition lock 56
Compartments, refer to Storage compartments 116
Compass, digital 114 Computer 70 displays in instrument
panel 70 displays on Control
Display 70 trip computer 71 "Concierge" 224 Concierge service 224 Condition Based Service
CBS 243 "Confirmation" 31 Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical devices 118
Connecting headphones 191 Consumption, refer to
Average fuel consumption 70
Consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 70
"Continue guidance to destination?" 149
"Contrast" DVD changer 182 DVD system in rear 194 Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16 Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16 setting brightness 79 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls DVD changer 179 DVD system in rear 190 refer to Cockpit 10
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
270
Convenience operation glass sunroof 30, 32 glass sunroof with comfort
access 37 windows 30, 32 windows with comfort
access 37 with comfort access 37 Coolant 242 checking level 242 temperature 69 Cooling, maximum 106 Cornering Brake Control
CBC 85 Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 102 Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 116 Cruise control 66 Cruising range 70 Cup holders 117 Curb weight, refer to
Weights 260 "Current position" 155 Current position displaying 155 entering 144 storing 144 "Customer
Relations" 216, 224 Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 258
D Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10 Data 258 capacities 261 dimensions 259 engine 258 technical data 258 weights 260 "Date" 79 Date 68 display format 79 retrieving 68 setting 79
"Date format" 79 "Daytime running lamps" 100 Daytime running lamps 100 "Deactivated" 45 Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Defrosting windows 105 Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 105 Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 105 "Delete address book" for
navigation 145 "Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 215 "Delete data" for
navigation 145 "Delete" for mobile
phone 215 Destination address deleting 145 entering 137, 139 Destination for navigation destination list 143 entering 136 selecting from address
book 144 selecting using
information 142 selecting using voice 139 storing 144 Destination guidance 148 canceling voice
instructions 52 changing specified
route 146 displaying route 149 distance and arrival 148 ending/continuing 148 starting 148 voice instructions 151 volume of voice
instructions 152 Destination list for navigation
system 143
Destinations recently driven to 143
"Details" DVD system in the rear 198 in audio mode 188 "Dial" for mobile phone 213 "Dial number" 213 "Diamond button" 52 Digital clock 68 Digital compass 114 Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 167 Digital Versatile Disc, refer to DVD changer 179 Player for navigation
DVD 160 Dimensions 259 Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64 Direction announcements,
refer to Voice instructions 151
Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 151
Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 144
Direct selection buttons 21 Displacement, refer to Engine
data 258 "Display" 79 Display, refer to iDrive 16 Displaying images 198 Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 102 "Display off" 21 Displays, refer to Instrument
panel 12 "Display settings" 79, 97 Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 97 Disposal battery of remote control
with comfort access 38 remote control battery 192 vehicle battery 251 Distance, refer to
Computer 70
R e
fe re
n ce
271
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
"Distance to dest." 71 Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 70 Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance Control 81
Door entry lighting 102 Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28 Door lock 31 Door locking, confirmation
signals 31 "Door locks" 30, 31, 73 Doors manual operation 32 remote control 29 DOT Quality Grades 235 Downhill driving assistance,
refer to HDC 87 Draft-free ventilation 107 Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 117 Drive for navigation DVDs 160 "Driver's door only" 30 Driver's seat, calibrating 47 "Driver's seat climate" 49 Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 99 Driving on poor roads 130 Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 149 Driving stability control
systems 85 Driving through water 127 Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 126 Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 106 Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 106 DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86 indicator lamp 13, 86 DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 86 activating 86 indicator lamp 87
"DVD" for DVD system in rear 192 in DVD changer 180 DVD DVD changer 179 DVD system in rear 190 player for navigation
DVD 160 DVD changer 179 adjusting brightness 182 adjusting contrast 182 adjusting tone 182, 185 audio and video
playback 180 audio playback 184 chapter selection 184 controls 179 DVD audio content 184 DVD control 181 DVD country codes 180 DVD-specific menu 183 fast forward 181 filling 179 installation position 179 malfunctions 180 removing DVDs 179 reverse 181 selecting audio
language 185 selecting language 182 selecting subtitles 183 selecting track 183 selecting viewing angle 183 skip chapter 181 zoom 182 "DVD format" for DVD system in rear 195 on DVD changer 182 DVD for navigation 134
DVD system in rear 190 CD/DVD player 191 connecting headphones 191 controls 190 displaying images from CD/
DVD 198 DVD country codes 192 external device 201 information on CD/DVD
player 200 playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD 196 playing video from CD/
DVD 192 remote control 191 switching on/off 192 Dynamic Performance
Control 87 "Dynamic route" for
navigation 147 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86 Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 86
E Easy entry/exit 51 Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 160 Electrical malfunction automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63 door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 230 glass sunroof, electric 41 parking brake 60 Electric seat 43 Electric steering wheel
adjustment 51 Electronic brake-force
distribution 85 Electronic oil level check 240
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
272
Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation
door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 230 transmission lock, automatic
transmission 63 Emergency request 252 Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 253 "Enabled services" 227 "Enable services" 227 "End call" 214 Engine breaking-in 126 data 258 oil temperature 69 overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 69 speed 258 starting 57 starting, with comfort
access 37 switching off 57 Engine compartment 240 Engine coolant 242 Engine oil adding 241 additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 241 approved engine oil 241 checking oil level 240 electronic oil level check 240 temperature 69 "Engine oil level" 241 Engine oil temperature 69 Engine output, refer to Engine
data 258 Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 69 Engine speed 258 Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 57 "Enter address" 137 Entering country of
destination 137 Entering destination 137
Entering house number or intersection 138
Entering intersection 138 Entering street 138 "Entertainment" 160 Entertainment sound output
on/off 161 "Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 163 Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 163 "ESN" 170 ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 86
Event Data Recorders 244 Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 127 Exterior mirrors 49 adjusting 49 automatic dimming
feature 51 automatic heating 50 folding in and out 50 tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 50 External audio device 116 refer to AUX-In
connection 186 Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow fitting 254
F Fader, refer to Tone
control 162 Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 75 False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36 Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 47 warning lamp 47 Fastening system,
adaptive 120
Fastest route for navigation 146
Fast forward CD changer 176 CD player 176 DVD changer 181 "Fast route" for
navigation 146 Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 75 Filler neck for washer fluid 65 First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 253 First-aid kit 253 Flashing during locking/
unlocking, refer to Setting confirmation signals 31
Flashlight 116 Flat tire changing wheels 248 compact wheel 248 Flat Tire Monitor 89 run-flat tires 90, 92, 237 TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 89 Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 65 "FM", reception
range 161, 164 FM, waveband 164 Fog lamps 101 indicator lamp 101 Folding display screen open/
closed, DVD system in rear 190
Folding rear seat backrest 120 Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 127 Footwell lamps 102 For your own safety 5 4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive 87 Front airbags 95 Front passenger airbags 95 deactivating 95 refer to Exception of front
passenger seat 53
R e
fe re
n ce
273
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Front seat adjustment 43 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 89 false alarms 90 indicating a flat tire 90 initializing the system 90 malfunction 94 snow chains 238 system limits 90 warning lamp 90 Fuel 231 capacity 261 display 69 high-quality brands 231 quality 231 saving 126 specifications 231 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 69 Fuel consumption display computer, average fuel
consumption 70 Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 69 Fuel filler door 230 closing 230 opening 230 releasing manually 230 Fuses 251
G Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote control 112
Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 231
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 69
Gear changes, automatic transmission with Steptronic 62
General driving notes 126, 127
Glass sunroof, electric 39 convenience operation from
outside 32 convenience operation with
comfort access 37 moving manually 41 opening, closing 40 power interruption 40 raising 39 remote control 30 Glove compartment 115 lighting 115 opening manually 115 GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 134 Grills, refer to Ventilation 107 Grills of the automatic climate
control 103 Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 260
H Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57 Automatic Hold 58 Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14 Hazard warning flashers 15 HDC Hill Descent Control 87 "HD radio" 167 HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 167 Head airbags 95 Headlamp control,
automatic 99 Headlamp flasher 64 Headlamps 99 care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 64 replacing bulbs 245 Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 101 Head restraints 46 sitting safely 42 "Head-Up Display" 97 Head-Up Display 97
Heated mirrors 50 rear window 105 seats 48 steering wheel 51 Heating 103 exterior mirrors 50 interior 103 rear window 105 residual heat 107 seats 48 steering wheel 51 Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual heat 107
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing cargo 130
Height, refer to Dimensions 259
Height adjustment seats 43 steering wheel 51 High beams 64, 101 headlamp flasher 64 indicator lamp 13 High Definition Radio 167 Highs, refer to Treble and
bass 161 High water, refer to Driving
through water 127 Highway, refer to Route
criteria 146 Hill Descent Control HDC 87 Hills 128 Holder for cups 117 Home address 146 "Home address" for
navigation 146 Homepage 4 Hood 239 Horn 10 Hot exhaust system 127 "Hour memo" 79 "House number" for
destination entry 139 Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 86 Hydroplaning 127
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
274
I IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 167 Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68 Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68 ID3 tag, refer to Information on
track 174 Identification, tire 238 Identification mark, run-flat
tires 237 iDrive 16 assistance window 20 changing language 80 changing menu page 19 changing settings 78 changing units of measure
and display type 79 confirming selection or
entry 19 controller 16 controls 16 displays, menus 17 selecting menu item 19 setting brightness 79 setting date 79 setting time 78 start menu 17 status information 20 symbols 18 Ignition 56 switched off 56 switched on 56 Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28 Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 56 Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 56 Ignition lock 56 starting engine with comfort
access 37 Independent ventilation, refer
to Parked car ventilation 109
Indicator/warning lamps 13 active steering 94 airbags 96 DSC 13, 86 DTC 87 fasten safety belt 47 Flat Tire Monitor 90 TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 92 Individual air distribution 106 Individually programmable
buttons on steering wheel 51
Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 28
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire inflation pressure 232
Inflation pressure monitoring refer to FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 89 refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91 Information on another location 142 on country 142 on current position 142 on destination location 142 "Information on
destination" 143 "Info sources" 73 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 90 refer to Power failure 251 refer to Setting date 79 refer to Setting time 78 seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 44 "Input map" 141 Installation position DVD changer 179 mobile phone 116 Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice instructions 151
Instrument cluster, refer to Instrument panel 12
Instrument illumination, refer to Instrument lighting 102
Instrument lighting 102
Instrument panel 12 refer to Cockpit 10 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote
control 112 Interesting destination for
navigation 142 "Interim time" 77 Interior lamps 102 switching on with remote
control 30 Interior motion sensor 36 switching off 36 Interior rearview mirror 50 automatic dimming
feature 51 compass 114 Intermittent mode of the
wipers 64
J Jacking points 249 Joystick refer to iDrive 16 refer to Selector lever,
selecting transmission positions 61
Jumpering, refer to Jump starting 253
Jump starting 253
K Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 36 Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 36 Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28 "Keypad" 216 Keys 28 key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28 Kick-down, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 62
Knock control 231
R e
fe re
n ce
275
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
L Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 99 Lamps and bulbs 245 "Language / Units" 79, 80 for navigation 135, 151 "Language" for DVD system
in rear 194, 195 "Languages" 80 for navigation 135, 151 Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 130 Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 143 "Last seat pos." 45 LATCH child restraint fixing
system 54 LEDs light-emitting
diodes 245 Length, refer to
Dimensions 259 License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 248 Liftgate 33 automatic operation 34 closing 34 locking and unlocking from
inside 32 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening manually 33 Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 245 Lighter 118 Lighter socket 118 "Lighting" 64, 100 Lighting instruments 102 lamps and bulbs 245 of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 99 Light switch 99 "Limit" 77 Loading securing cargo 130 stowing cargo 129 vehicle 128
Load securing equipment, refer to Securing cargo 130
"Lock after driving" 32 Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 32 Locking from inside 32 setting confirmation
signals 31 using remote control 29 without key, refer to Comfort
access 36 Locking and unlocking doors from inside 32 setting confirmation
signals 31 Low beams 99 automatic 99 Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 44 Lows, refer to Treble and
bass 161 Lug bolts 249 tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 250 wrench 249 Luggage compartment
capacity, refer to Cargo bay capacity 260
Luggage rack, refer to Roof- mounted luggage rack 130
Lumbar support 44
M M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 238 "Main menu" for DVD system
in rear 195 Maintenance refer to Service and
Warranty Information Booklet for US models 243
refer to Service requirements 72
refer to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 243
Maintenance system 243
Malfunction door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 230 glass sunroof, electric 41 parking brake 60 Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 75 Manual air distribution 105 Manually releasing
transmission lock 63 Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 62
"Manual" on radio 165 Manual operation door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 230 transmission lock, automatic
transmission 63 Map changing scale 150 destination entry 141 "Map direction of travel" 150 "Map facing north" 150 Map facing north 150 Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28 Maximum cooling 106 Maximum speed for winter tires 238 with compact wheel 250 Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel memory 44
"Menu" for DVD system in
rear 193, 195 on DVD changer 181, 183 Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Message list for traffic
information 153 Microfilter 108 Microphone for mobile phone 14 for telephone 14 for voice command
system 14
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
276
Mirror dimming feature 51 Mirrors 49 automatic curb monitor 50 exterior mirrors 49 folding in and out 50 heating 50 interior rearview mirror 50 memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel memory 44
"Missed calls" 214 Missed calls 215 Mobile phone accepted calls 215 adjusting volume 212 calling 213 ending call 213 installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 116 missed calls 215 operation via iDrive 212 redialing 215 refer to separate operating
instructions Top 8 215 touch tone dialing 216 Monitor, refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring tire pressure, refer
to FTM Flat Tire Monitor 89 "Monitor on / off" 52 MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 173 Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher/high beams 64
refer to Washer/wiper system 64
Music track, refer to Tracks 174
"Mute on / off" 52
N "Navigation" 70, 136, 142 Navigation destination entering manually 137, 139 home address 146 selecting via map 141 Navigation drive, installation
location 134 Navigation DVD 134 player 160 Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice instructions on/off 151
Navigation system 134 address book 144 changing route 152 destination entry 136 destination guidance in
assistance window 134 destination list 143 displaying current
position 155 displaying route 149 ending/continuing
destination guidance 148 entering a destination
manually 137, 139 last destinations 143 navigation DVD 134 opening 136 route list 150 searching for a special
destination 142 selecting destination using
information 142 selecting destination via
map 141 selecting route criteria 146 starting destination
guidance 148 switching off, refer to
Ending/continuing destination guidance 148
voice instructions 151 volume adjustment 152
"Navigation voice instructions" 52, 135
Neck support, refer to Head restraints 46
"New address" for navigation 144
"New destination" 137, 141 New remote control 28 "New route" 152 New wheels and tires 237 "Next entertainment
source" 52 "No video signal" for DVD
system in rear 201 Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 65 "NTSC color" for DVD system
in rear 202 Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 254
O OBD socket 244 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 231 Odometer 68 Oil additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 241 approved engine oils 241 consumption, refer to
Checking engine oil level 240
level 240 refilling, refer to Adding
engine oil 241 Oil change interval, refer to
Service requirements 72 "On a new destination" for
navigation 142 Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16 "Onboard info" 70 Onboard toolkit 245 "On destination" 142 "On location" 142
R e
fe re
n ce
277
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Opening and closing comfort access 36 from inside 32 using remote control 29 using the door lock 31 Operation by voice for mobile
phone 217 adjusting volume 218 canceling 217 correcting phone
number 218 dialing phone number 218 placing a call 218 redialing 219 voice commands 217 voice phone book 218 Operation on poor roads 130 "Options" 225 Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17 Output, refer to Engine
data 258 Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air control 106
Outside temperature display 68
changing unit of measure 79 Outside temperature
warning 68 "Overview" for DVD system in
rear 199
P Panic mode 30 Park Distance Control PDC 81 "Parked car operation" 110 "Parked car ventilation" 110 Parked car ventilation 109 activating activation
time 110 preselecting activation
times 110 switching on and off
directly 110 Parking, vehicle 57
Parking aid refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 81 refer to Rear view camera 83 Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance Control 81
Parking brake 57 Automatic Hold 58 indicator lamp 13 Parking lamps 99 Parking with Automatic
Hold 59 Parts and accessories 6 "Passenger's seat climate" 49 Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 50 "Pathway lighting" 100 Pathway lighting 100 "Pause" for DVD system in
rear 196 Paying attention to speed 238 "PDC" 82 "PDC in main window only" 82 PDC Park Distance Control 81 Personal Profile 28 "Perspective" 150 Phone book 212 creating and editing voice
phone book 218 Phone numbers deleting from phone
book 215 dialing 213 most recent numbers 215 selecting in phone book 215 Top 8 215 "Photo" for DVD system in
rear 192, 198 Pinch protection system glass sunroof, electric 40 power windows 39 Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 253 "Play" for DVD system in rear 196 on satellite radio 171 Playing videos, DVD system in
rear 192
Plug-in unit for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 56
Pocket light, refer to Flashlight 116
Position displaying 155 storing, refer to Storing
current position 144 Power failure 251 Power windows, refer to
Windows 38 Preselecting activation times
of parked car ventilation 110 "Presets" displaying on radio 164 on satellite radio 171 Pressure, tires 232 monitoring, refer to TPM
Tire Pressure Monitor 91 "Profile" 227 Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 51 Programmable memory
buttons 21 Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system 39, 40
R Radio autostore 165 controls 160 High Definition Radio 167 sampling stations 165 satellite radio 170 selecting frequency
manually 165 selecting
waveband 160, 164 station search 165 station with the best
reception 165 storing stations 166 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 Weather Band 169
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
278
Radio key, refer to Keys/ remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 56
Radio readiness 56 switched off 56 switched on 56 with comfort access 37 Rain sensor 65 "Random" for DVD system in rear 197 refer to Random
sequence 176 "Random all" for DVD system in rear 198 in audio mode 176 "Random directory" for DVD system in rear 198 in audio mode 176 Random sequence 176 "RDS" Radio Data
System 167 Reading lamps 102 Rear automatic climate
control 108 activating on Control
Display 108 air supply 109 switching off 109 "Rear climate control" 108 "Rear enabled" 190 Rear entertainment, refer to
DVD system in rear 190 Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 246 replacing bulbs 246 Rear seat backrest,
folding 120 Rear seats folding over backrest 120 heating 48, 49 Rear socket 118 Rear ventilation 108 rear automatic climate
control 108
Rear view camera 83 cleaning 85 displaying 85 driver assistance
functions 83 switching off 83 switching on 83 Rearview mirror 49 Rear window, heating 105 Rear window safety switch 39 "Received calls" 214 Recent numbers in mobile
phone 215 Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status information 20
Recirculated-air mode 106 air recirculation 106 AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 106 Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 43 Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 77 "Redial" for mobile phone 214 Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 246 Refueling 230 Releasing hood 239 refer to Unlocking 37 "Relock door if not
opened" 32 Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 70 Remaining distance to
destination, refer to Computer 70
Remote control 28 comfort access 36 DVD system in rear 191 garage door opener 112 liftgate 30 malfunction 31, 38 replacing battery 38 Removing condensation on
the windows 105
"Repeat" for DVD system in rear 197 in audio mode 176 "Repeat directory" for DVD system in
rear 196, 198 in audio mode 176 "Repeat track" for DVD system in
rear 196, 198 in audio mode 176 Replacement fuses 251 Replacement of tires 237 changing wheels 248 new wheels and tires 237 Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 245 Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 237 Replacing wiper blades 245 Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating an emergency request 252
Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 69 "Reset" 90, 92 DVD changer 182 DVD system in rear 195 sound settings 163 stopwatch 77 Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 163 "resetting FTM " 90 Residual heat 107 Restraint systems for children 53 refer to Safety belts 47 Retreaded tires 237 "Return" DVD changer 183 DVD system in rear 195 Reverse CD changer 176 CD player 176 DVD changer 181
R e
fe re
n ce
279
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Reverse gear, automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
Road map 150 "Roadside Assistance" 222 Roadside Assistance 253 Roadside assistance 222 Roadside parking lamps 101 Roller sun blinds 115 Roof load capacity 260 Roof-mounted luggage
rack 130 Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 254 Rotary pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16 Route 146 changing 152 displaying 149 displaying arrow display 149 displaying map view 150 displaying roads and towns/
cities 150 displaying towns/cities 150 list 150 selecting 146 selecting criteria 146 RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run- flat tires 237
Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 237
Run-flat tires 237 continuing driving with a
damaged tire 90, 92 flat tire 90, 92 new wheels and tires 237 tire inflation
pressure 90, 92, 232 tire replacement 237
S Safety 5 Safety belts 47 damage 47 sitting safely 42 warning lamp 47 Safety belt tensioners refer to Airbags 95 refer to Safety belts 47 Safety systems ABS Antilock Brake
System 85 airbags 95 driving stability control
systems 85 DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86 safety belts 47 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 237 "SAT" 161, 170 Satellite radio 170 displaying additional
information 171 enabling 170 selecting channel 171 storing channel 171 "Scan" for DVD system in rear 197 sampling stations with
radio 165 sampling tracks on CD 175 Scan CD changer 175 CD player 175 radio 165 "Scan all" DVD system in rear 198 in audio mode 175 "Scan directory" for DVD system in rear 198 in audio mode 175 Screen, refer to iDrive 16 Screw thread for tow
fitting 254 SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 170 "Seat heater distribution" 48
Seat heating 48 Seats 43 adjusting 43 adjusting electrically 43 adjusting manually 43 backrest width 44 heating 48 lumbar support 44 memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel memory 44
shoulder support 44 sitting safely 42 storing the setting 44 thigh support 43, 44 ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation and Seat heating 48
Securing load refer to Securing cargo 130 with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 122 "Select as
destination" 142, 225 "Select current speed" 77 Selecting audio source 160 Selecting country for
navigation 137 Selecting frequency
manually 165 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting new scale for
navigation 150 Selector lever, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 61
Selector lever lock, refer to Reverse gear 61
Self-leveling suspension 89 Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 253 Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models 243
"Service Info" 73, 223, 240 Service interval indicator, refer
to Service requirements 72 "Service Request" 216, 223
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
280
"Service requirements" 73, 223, 241
Service requirements 72 also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 243 "SET" DVD changer 181 rear seat entertainment 193 "Set date" 79 "Set" on trip computer 71 "Set service date" 74 "Set time" 78 "Settings" 227 for unlocking 30 Settings changing on Control
Display 78 clock, 12h/24h mode 79 configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 28 Setting speed limit 77 Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation times 110
Shifting, automatic transmission with Steptronic 62
Short commands of voice command system 262
Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 146
"Short route" for navigation 146
Shoulder support 44 "Show current position" 141 "Show destination
position" 141 Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 176 CD player 176 Side airbags 95 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 42 with airbags 42 with head restraint 42 with safety belts 42 Ski bag 121 Slide show, refer to Displaying
images 198
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass sunroof, electric 39
Slope assistant, refer to Starting assistant 89
Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 117
Snow chains 238 Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 244 Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 56 Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 118 Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 33 Song search, refer to
Sampling tracks 175 SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 252 Spare fuses 251 Spare remote control 28 Spare wheel refer to Changing
wheels 248 refer to Compact wheel 248 Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 241 Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 241 Speed with compact wheel 250 with winter tires 238 Speed-dependent
volume 162 Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 77 Speedometer 12 "Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 162 Sport program, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 62
Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 85
"Standard" for DVD system in rear 195, 202
"Star button" 52
Start/Stop button 56 "Start" for stopwatch 77 "Start guidance" 139 Starting, refer to Starting
engine 57 Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 253 Starting assistant 89 Starting difficulties, jump
starting 253 Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 89 Start menu, iDrive 17 "Start service" 222 "Start Service" with BMW
Assist 224 "State / Province" for
destination entry 137 Station, refer to Radio 164 "Status" 74 Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5 Steering wheel adjusting 51 automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel memory 44
buttons on steering wheel 11
easy entry/exit 51 heating 51 memory 44 programmable buttons 51 "Steering wheel buttons" 52 Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 94 Steptronic, refer to Sport
program and manual mode M/S 62
"Stop" stopwatch 77 "Stopwatch" 77 Stopwatch 77 Storage compartments 116 "Store" on radio 166 on satellite radio 172 "Store in address book" for
navigation 144
R e
fe re
n ce
281
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Storing current position 144 Storing radio stations 166 Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory 44
Storing tires 238 "Street" for destination
entry 138 "Subtitles" for DVD system in
rear 195 Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 232 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching cooling function on
and off 106 Switching off engine 57 Switching on audio 160 CD changer 160 CD player 160 radio 160 Switching on hour signal 79 Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 101 Symbols 4 indicator/warning lamps 13 navigation system 154 traffic information with
navigation system 152
T Tachometer 69 "Tailgate" 34 Tail lamps 246 replacing bulbs 246 Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 261 Target cursor for
navigation 141 Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5 Technical data 258 Telematic, refer to
TeleService, BMW Assist 221
Telephone refer to Mobile phone 206 refer to separate operating
instructions "Telephone list" 52 TeleService 223 Temperature adjusting in upper body
region 105 adjusting with automatic
climate control 105, 109 changing units of
measure 79 refer to Coolant
temperature 69 Temperature display outside temperature 68 setting units 79 temperature warning 68 Temperature warning 68 Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66 "Terminate services" 226 "Text language" 80 The individual vehicle 5 Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 248 Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After mounting 250
Tilt alarm sensor, switching off 36
Tilting down passenger-side exterior mirror 50
"Time" 78 "Time / Date" 78 "Time format" 79 Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 110 "Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation 110 "Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation 110 Tire inflation pressures 232 checking 232 monitoring, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89 Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Tire Quality Grading 235 Tires age 235 air loss 90, 92 breaking-in 126 changing 237 condition 236 damage 236 flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 248 inflation pressure 232 inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to FTM Flat Tire Monitor 89
new wheels and tires 237 pressure loss 90, 92 pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 91
replacing 248 retreaded tires 237 run-flat tires 237 size 235 tread 236 wear indicators 236 wheel/tire combination 237 winter tires 238 "Title" for DVD system in
rear 195 TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 152 "Tone" 161 for DVD system in rear 195 Tone in audio mode adjusting 161 middle setting 163 Tools, refer to Onboard
toolkit 245 "Top 8" for mobile phone 214 Torque engine 258 lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 250 Touch tone dialing 216 Tow fitting 254 Towing 254 tow fitting 254 "Town / City" for destination
entry 137
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
to Z
282
Town/city for destination entry 137
Tow-starting 254, 255 "TPM" 92 TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91 resetting system 92 system limits 91 warning lamp 92 Tracks finding 175 random sequence 176 sampling, scan 175 Track width, refer to
Dimensions 259 Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 86
Traction control, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 86
Traffic congestion bypassing 155 displaying traffic
information 152 Traffic information for
navigation depiction in route map 153 displaying 153 during destination
guidance 155 switching on/off 152 symbols 154 "Traffic Info settings" 152 Transmission automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61 manually releasing
transmission lock on automatic transmission with Steptronic 63
Transmission positions, refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 61
Transporting children safely 53
Transport securing device, refer to Securing cargo 130
Tread depth, refer to Minimum tread depth 236
Treble, refer to Tone control 161
"Treble / Bass" for DVD system in rear 195
"Trip computer" 71 Trip computer 71 Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 68 "Triple turn signal" 64 Trip odometer 68 Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 259 Turn signals 64 indicator lamp 12 replacing bulbs 246
U Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 235
"Units" 80 Units average fuel
consumption 79 temperature 79 Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 112
Universal remote control 112 "Unlock button" 30 Unlocking from inside 32 liftgate 30 using remote control 30 without key, refer to Comfort
access 36 Unlocking and locking doors,
using remote control 30 Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36 "Unlock rear menu" for DVD
system in rear 190 "Update services" 225
USB audio interface 187 "USB" in audio
mode 186, 188 Used batteries refer to Disposal 251 refer to Replacing battery 38
V Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 250 Vehicle battery 250 breaking-in 126 care 244 care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure decommissioning, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
loading 128 measurements, refer to
Dimensions 259 parking 57 washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure weights 260 "Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30 Vehicle jack 249 jacking points 249 Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current position 155
Ventilation 107 draft-free 107 in the rear 108 rear automatic climate
control 109 while stationary 109 Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 103 Vents, refer to Ventilation 107 "Vent settings" 106 "Video settings" for DVD
system in rear 194 Voice, refer to Voice
instructions for navigation system 151
R e
fe re
n ce
283
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Voice command system 23 short commands 262 Voice instructions for
navigation system 151 muting 52, 151 repeating 52, 151 switching on/off 52, 151 volume 152 Voice phone book 218 Volume 160 audio sources 160 mobile phone 212 setting speed-
dependent 162 voice instructions 152 Volume distribution in audio
mode front/rear 162 right/left 162 Volume of warning tones 80
W Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to Check Control 75
Warning tone, volume 80 Warning triangle 253 Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models 243
Washer/wiper system 64 rain sensor 65 washer fluid 65 windshield washer
nozzles 65 Washer fluid 65 capacity of the reservoir 66 Washing the vehicle, also refer
to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 127
Waveband for radio 164 "WB" 169 Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 236
Weather Band 169 Website 4 Weights 260 "Welcome light" 100 Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 237 Wheel/tire damage 236 Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 259 Wheels and tires 232 Width, refer to
Dimensions 259 Windows 38 convenience operation 30 convenience operation from
outside 32 convenience operation with
comfort access 37 opening, closing 38 pinch protection system 39 safety switch 39 Windshield cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 64 defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 105 displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 97 Windshield washer system refer to Washer/wiper
system 64 windshield washer
nozzles 65 Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer/wiper system 64 replacing wiper blades 245 Winter tires 238 storage 238 "With highways" for
navigation 146 Word matching principle for
navigation 147 Working in the engine
compartment 239 Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 245
X xDrive 87 Xenon light 245 bulb changing 245
Z "Zoom" for DVD system in
rear 195
01 41
0 01
5 02
1 u
e
*BL001502100V*
The Ultimate Drivin
Related manuals for BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the X6 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW X6 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW X6 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW X6 xDrive 50i SUV X6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.